Item 06 Suspension of Competitive Bidding, Contract Supplements and Budgetary Adjustments for the Martin Luther King Jr. (MLK) Library Renovation Project: (C15000840) (Two-Thirds Vote Required) [Published for 10-Day Review 1/23/2025] PART 3 — Sacramento City Council, February 4, 2025 (part 5 of 9)

1. Where more than one nominal voltage system exists in a building or facility, the identification of color coding used in the panelboard or equipment shall be permanently posted on the interior of the door or cover.

F. Distribution panelboards and switchboards shall have each overcurrent protection device identified with name and location of the load being served ("AHU-1 LOCATED IN PENTHOUSE 1"). Provide a separate engraved plastic laminate label adjacent to each overcurrent projection device with feeder wire size, feeder wire quantity, conductor material and distance in feet. Provide label separate from load identification label and adjustable trip settings label.

1. Sample Labels for Feeders:
4#3/0 CU & 1#6 CU GND, 125FT
4#250KCM AL & 1#6 GND CU, 125FT
2 SETS 4#400KCM CU & 1#1 GND CU, 125FT
G. Branch panelboards shall be provided with typed panel schedules upon completion of the project. Existing panelboards shall have their existing panel schedules typed, with all circuit changes, additions or deletions also typed on the panel schedules. A copy of all panel schedules for the project shall be turned over as part of the O&M Manuals. Refer to Section 26 0500 for other requirements.

3.10 INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANEL IDENTIFICATION
A. Products:

1. Nameplates and signs
B. Provide identification on the front of all industrial control panels and similar equipment. Labels
shall be visible on the exterior of the gear and correspond to the one-line and/or schematic diagram nomenclature.

1. Interior equipment: The identification material shall be engraved plastic-laminated labels.

2. Labeling shall include:
a. Equipment type and contract documents designation of equipment. b. Manufacturer / Assembler of industrial control panel c. Voltage, phase, frequency, full load current of each supply circuit d. Name of the upstream equipment and location of the upstream equipment if it is not located within sight.
e. Rating and type of the overcurrent protection device serving the equipment if it is not located within sight ("FED BY 400A/3P BREAKER").
f. Sample Label:

INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANEL ICP-1

ABC COMPANY
480V, 3PHASE, 60HZ, 60A (PANEL E1-1 LOCATED IN ELEC 123) 120V, 1PHASE, 60HZ, 20A (PANEL E2-1 LOCATED IN ELEC 123) 22,000 SHORT CIRCUIT RATING
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 26 0553-10
C. Nominal System Voltage Label:

1. Where more than one nominal voltage system exists in a building or facility, the identification of color coding used shall be permanently posted on the interior of the door or cover of the industrial control panel.

D. Schematic Diagram: Provide a laminated copy of the industrial control panel schematic wiring diagram. Post the diagram on the inside cover of the control panel.

E. Service Equipment Label: Refer to Electrical Distribution Equipment - Service Equipment Label of this specification if applicable for additional requirements.

3.11 ELECTRICAL WORKING CLEARANCE IDENTIFICATION
A. Products:

1. Safety Yellow paint and custom stencils
B. Provide custom identification of electrical equipment working clearances in mechanical, electrical, storage, janitorial, and similar non-public areas.

C. Identification shall include a painted rectangular box (on the finished floor) in front of the electrical equipment to define the code-required working clearance. Provide additional diagonal stripping inside the rectangle box. All painted stripping shall be safety yellow paint with 3 inch wide stripes.

1. Width of area: Width of equipment or as required by code

2. Depth of area: Depth as required by code
END OF SECTION 26 0553
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 POWER SYSTEM STUDY SECTION 26 0573-1
SECTION 26 0573 - POWER SYSTEM STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Medium and low voltage distribution system power study.

B. Short-circuit analysis and report.

C. Arc-flash hazard analysis and report.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 26 0500 - Basic Electrical Requirements
B. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Analyses shall be performed by an agent authorized by the manufacturer of equipment specified in the related specification sections.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Documentation shall bear the seal/signature of the licensed Professional Engineer who performed the analysis.

B. The input for the power system study shall be based on the contract documents, with estimated conductor lengths and field investigation of existing equipment types, sizes, and ratings provided by the Electrical Contractor.

C. Documentation of the analyses shall be submitted in a single bound electronic (PDF or equal) format and shall accompany the shop drawing submittals for equipment provided under the related work specification sections. The submittal of these related specification sections will not be reviewed without this documentation. Submit a sample arc-flash hazard label for Owner review and approval prior to printing.

D. Power system study project model shall be submitted on electronic media for review and the Owner's operating and maintenance records.

1.5 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
B. CEC California Electrical Code
C. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace D. IEEE 1584 - IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations, latest version E. ANSI Z535.4 - Products Safety Signs and Labels
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 POWER SYSTEM STUDY SECTION 26 0573-2

1.6 SCOPE
A. Provide a power system study of the electrical system shown on the plans. The study shall include arc-fault analysis, selective coordination analysis and arc flash hazard analysis.

B. Contractor is required to provide a fully coordinated system for the normal electrical system or electrical system and the associated normal side of each transfer switch and all other locations indicated on the one line diagram. Contractor shall provide overcurrent protective devices with the appropriate models, frame sizes, trip units, etc. as required to provide a selectively coordinated system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER SYSTEM STUDY
A. Power systems study shall be completed in Power Tools for Windows (PTW) version 10 or later version or pre-approved equivalent program.

B. Power system studies including, but not limited to short-circuit analysis, selective coordination, and arc-flash analysis are inherently iterative in nature. The initial and subsequent analysis commonly requires engineering evaluation, equipment modification, setting adjustments, and revised analysis report. The power system analysis scope shall not be considered complete until all outstanding engineering, equipment and device setting solutions have been resolved and documented by a final report. The power system study vendor shall provide inclusive bid provisions for the initial, subsequent, final analysis and associated reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SHORT-CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
A. Provide a complete short-circuit analysis from the utility service to and including the entire building distribution as shown on the drawings.

B. Analysis shall include the entire distribution system from the point of connection to the utility power source to the distribution panels and branch circuit panelboards.

C. Short-circuit analysis documentation shall be made in one-line diagram form showing the magnitude and location of each calculated fault. Fault current calculations shall be made at the main bus of each switchboard, distribution panel, and branch circuit panel. A summary of the fault currents available shall also be submitted and made available to the AHJ if requested.

3.2 SELECTIVE COORDINATION ANALYSIS
A. Provide a complete selective coordination analysis comparing time/current curves of the protective devices to be installed to assure coordination between main and downstream devices.

Overcurrent protection devices shall be coordinated based on the maximum available fault current results of the short-circuit analysis report.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 POWER SYSTEM STUDY SECTION 26 0573-3
B. Existing Distribution, Selective Coordination, and Analysis:

1. The scope of work includes modification, replacement, adjustments, or additions of the emergency distribution system. A complete analysis and evaluation of the existing branches is required in addition to the evaluation and analysis of the new distribution system components.

2. The contractor shall provide field investigation service to collect all pertinent information required for a complete analysis and evaluation including but not limited to:
a. Over Current Protection Device (OCPD): Manufacturer, model, ratings, and settings
b. Feeder and Branch Circuit Conductor: Wire gauge sizes, lengths, and material type c. Transformers: Manufacturer, model, transformer KVA, impedance, phase, voltage, configuration
d. Existing Distribution System Documentation: One line or riser diagram relationship of all distribution equipment including switchboards, switchgear, distribution panels, branch panelboards, transformers, transfer switches, emergency power supply, all line side normal and emergency power systems serving the applicable branches from the main electrical service and emergency power supply to the final branch circuit over current protection device.

C. Provide trip settings for all (selectively coordinated and non-selectively coordinated) adjustable trip over current protection devices including long time delay, long time pickup, short time delay, short time pickup, instantaneous and ground fault. Selectively coordinated branches shall be based on the selective coordination study results. Non-selective coordinated branches shall be based on the design trip ratings. Provide selective coordination between all ground fault trip settings.

D. The analysis shall include primary protective device, secondary main switchboard/switchgear device(s), switchboard/switchgear branch feeder devices, generator breaker, distribution panel, panelboard main devices, and branch feeder devices.

E. The analysis shall include all normal, overcurrent protection devices served by the same electrical bus and directly in parallel with the branch requiring selective coordination.

F. The coordination plots provided shall indicate graphically the coordination proposed for the system on full-size log forms and shall define the types of protective devices selected, together with proposed time dial and pickup settings required. The plots shall include titles, representative one-line diagrams, legend, complete parameters for transformer(s), and complete operating bands for circuit breaker trip devices, fuses, etc.

1. The long-time region of the coordination plots shall designate the pickups required for the circuit breakers.

2. The short-time region shall indicate the magnetizing in-rush and ASA-withstand- transformer parameter, the circuit breaker, short-time and instantaneous trip devices, fuse-manufacturing tolerance bands, significant symmetrical fault currents, etc.

3. Molded case circuit breakers shall be separated from each other and the associated primary protective device by a 16% current margin for coordination and protection in the event of secondary line-to-line faults.

4. Include zone selective interlocking, differential relaying, and other selective coordination technology in the study when required by other specification sections.

5. The protective device characteristics or operating bands shall be suitably indicated to reflect the actual symmetrical fault currents sensed by the device.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 POWER SYSTEM STUDY SECTION 26 0573-4

6. The drawings and specifications indicate the general requirements for motors, motor- starting equipment, and medium-voltage and low-voltage equipment, but additional specific requirements of equipment furnished shall be determined in accordance with the results of the coordination study.
a. The study shall include verification of equipment ratings and settings. The Contractor shall keep the study up-to-date with any project changes which affect the study and submit the revised study for review. A final electronic copy shall be submitted with the record drawings.

G. Provide summary table of adjustable overcurrent protective devices settings for the operating and maintenance manual.

3.3 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that are presented in NFPA70E.

B. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, unit substations, motor-control centers, panelboards, busway, and splitters) where work could be performed on energized parts.

C. Safe working distances shall be based on the calculated arc flash boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.

D. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit analysis and coordination study models. Ground overcurrent relays should not be taken into consideration when determining the clearing time when performing incident energy calculations.

E. The short-circuit calculations and the corresponding incident energy calculations for multiple system scenarios must be compared, and the greatest incident energy must be uniquely reported for each equipment location. Calculations must be performed to represent the maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude for all normal and emergency operating conditions. The minimum calculation will assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and will assume a minimum motor contribution (all motors off). Conversely, the maximum calculation will assume a maximum contribution from the utility and will assume the maximum amount of motors to be operating. Calculations shall take into consideration the parallel operation of synchronous generators with the electric utility, where applicable.

F. The incident energy calculations must consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations must take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators should be decremented as follows:

1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond 3 to 5 cycles.

2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to 3 per unit after 10 cycles).

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 POWER SYSTEM STUDY SECTION 26 0573-5
G. For each equipment location with a separately enclosed main device (where there is adequate separation between the line side terminals of the main protective device and the work location), calculations for incident energy and flash protection boundary shall include both the line and load side of the main breaker.

H. Include Arc Energy Reduction (AER) analysis in the study when required by other specification sections.

I. When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a main breaker (as required per the above), the line side and load side contributions must be included in the fault calculation.

J. Miscoordination should be checked among all devices within the branch containing the immediate protective device upstream of the calculation location, and the calculation should utilize the fastest device to compute the incident energy for the corresponding location.

K. Where it is not physically possible to move outside the flash protection boundary in less than 2 seconds during an arc flash event, a maximum clearing time based on the specific location shall be utilized.

L. Create and install NFPA 70E compliant labels describing the arc flash hazard level at all switchboards, panelboards, and other locations in the electrical distribution system where work could be performed on energized parts.

M. Labels shall be vinyl or laminated, with a self-adhesive backing, conform with ANSI Z535.4 Products Safety Signs and Labels standard, and include the following:

1. Arc flash boundary

2. Available incident energy calculated in the analysis and the corresponding working distance, or the arc flash personal protective equipment (PPE category) for the equipment, but not both.

N. Examples showing the minimum required information follow:

O. A list of all hazard categories and the corresponding PPE requirements shall be posted in the main electric room, engineering office, or other location. The list shall be plastic laminate or typewritten and housed in a plastic frame.

3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Manufacturer's authorized representative or Contractor shall set all adjustable protective devices to values indicated in the approved coordination study. Apply settings prior to placing equipment into operation. When the scope of work or execution includes remodel or phases construction, the contractor shall adjust applicable settings as required prior to each system component placed in operation.

B. Wherever the arc flash incident energy exceeds Arc Flash Category 2 (i.e. greater than 8 cal/cm^2), provide options for adjusting breaker trip times, if possible, to reduce energies to Category 2 or below.

3.5 TRAINING
A. Provide four hours of Owner training to explain the implications of arc-flash requirements and work permit procedure.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 POWER SYSTEM STUDY SECTION 26 0573-6
END OF SECTION 26 0573
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 0800-1
SECTION 26 0800 - COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description
B. Responsibilities
C. Related Work
D. Test Equipment

1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. The purpose of this section is to specify Division 26 responsibilities in the commissioning process.

B. The systems to be commissioned are listed in the Commissioning Plan (Cx Plan). Refer to Section 01 9100.

C. Commissioning requires the participation of the Division 26 Contractor to ensure that all systems are operating in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general commissioning requirements and coordination are detailed in Section 01 9100. Division 26 Contractor shall be familiar with all parts of Section 01 9100 and the commissioning plan issued by the CxA, and shall execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents.

1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Refer to the Cx Plan in the appendix of Section 01 9100.

1.4 RELATED WORK
A. Specific commissioning requirements are given in the following sections of these specifications. All the following sections apply to the Work of this section.

1. Commissioning Plan (Cx Plan)

2. Section 01 7823 - Operations and Maintenance

3. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training

4. Section 01 9100 - Commissioning

5. Section 21 0800 - Commissioning of Fire Suppression

6. Section 22 0800 - Commissioning of Plumbing

7. Section 23 0800 - Commissioning of HVAC
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 0800-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this Division. This equipment includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Test equipment required for NETA Acceptance Testing.

2. Light meter.

3. Sound level meter.

4. Digital multimeter capable of measuring voltage (AC/DC), current, and resistance.

5. Power quality and energy analyzer capable of capturing waveform (3 phase) and data recording.

6. Handheld thermal imaging camera.

B. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the related specifications. All equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates readily available.

C. Refer to Section 01 9100 for additional Division 26 requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Refer to the Cx Plan in the appendix of Section 01 9100.

END OF SECTION 26 0800
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-1
SECTION 26 0933 - LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Lighting Control Overview
B. Device Color and Coverplates
C. Standalone Line and Low Voltage Lighting Controls

1. Wall switches and wall dimmers

2. Sensors (occupancy, vacancy, daylighting, photocell, auxiliary power packs, etc.) D. Room-Based Lighting Controls (specification grade, commonly distributed controllers, occasionally networked, 'intelligent' controls)

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The lighting system design includes a combination of luminaire sources, lighting control components, programming sequences, and supplementary components for building and energy code compliance. The design uses performance-based specifications for portions of the lighting system to account for the limitation of directly comparable product solutions available by competitive manufacturers. The Contractor shall reference related specification sections, plans, schedules, and details prior to submitting pricing, submittals, and installation. The Contractor shall coordinate system component compatibility among various manufacturers and suppliers for a turnkey lighting system. Referenced sections include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Specification Section 26 5119 LED Lighting

2. Electrical Drawings: Electrical Coversheet, plans, luminaire schedules, lighting control sequence of operations, diagrams, and details.

1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01 9100 - Commissioning

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in simil
ar service for not less than five (5) years.

B. All components and assemblies are to be factory pre-tested prior to delivery and installation.

1.5 REFERENCES
A. FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, Subpart J - Radio Frequency Interference B. FS W S 896 Switch, Toggle
C. California Energy Code - Building Energy Efficiency Standards Title 24 IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-2
D. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices E. NEMA WD 7 - Occupancy Motion Sensors
F. CEC California Electrical Code

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Submit a comprehensive package including devices, hardware, software, product specification, finishes, dimensions, installation instructions, component replacement instructions, warranty, system software requirements, and roles and responsibilities of all persons and groups involved in installation, execution, and commissioning.

C. Provide floor plan showing location, orientation, and coverage area of each control device, sensor, and controller/interface. For areas requiring multiple sensor devices for appropriate coverage, submit specific manufacturer-approved sensor layout as an overlay directly on the project drawings, either in print or approved electronic form. Sensor coverage patterns shall have a 20% overlap.

D. Submit a list of devices and equipment that will be installed for each sequence of operation.

E. Submit project specific control wiring diagrams showing all equipment, line voltage, and control wiring requirements for all components including, but not limited to, dimmers, relays, low voltage switches, occupancy sensors, control stations, and communication interfaces and programming instructions for each sequence of operation. Include network cable specification and end-of-line termination details, if required.

F. Programming Sequences: Provide a copy of the initial lighting control programming sequences in narrative and manufac
turer/vendor format.

G. Lighting Control Stations: The manufacturer/vendor shall provide control station shop drawings showing arrangement of controls, dimensioned elevations, wiring diagram, and recommended backboxes. Label each applicable submittal with the applicable Sequence Of Operation SOO description. Submit data sheets on the switches, dimmers, sensors, buttons, etc. contained in the control station.

H. Nameplate Labels and Custom Engraving: Submit sample label/engraving text for review for each applicable Lighting Sequence Of Operation SOO. Include reference to applicable SOO description.

Provide stencil templates for each device requiring stenciling.

I. Network / Internet Connected Equipment: These specifications may require certain equipment or systems to have network, Internet and/or remote access capability ('Network Capability'). Any requirement for Network Capability shall be interpreted only as a functional capability and is not to be constructed as authority to connect or enable any Network Capability. Network Capability may only be connected or enabled with the express written consent of the Owner. Provide Owner written consent and instructions as a submittal.

1.7 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide extra stock under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Sensors, Controls, Power Supplies, and Relays: Five (5) percent of quantity installed. Minimum of two (2) of each configuration and type.

D. Control Stations: One (1) of each configuration and type, except for LCD (SW-LDC) touch screens and portable PCS (SW-PCS) control stations requiring factory setup prior to installation.

E. Handheld Lighting Control Programming Stations: Provide two (2) lighting control programming stations when a proprietary controller is available and applicable to the specific lighting control system.

F. Web App for Owner Provided Devices: Assist Owner with the download and setup of the web application programming tool on ten (10) Owner provided cellphones, tablets, and similar devices when available and applicable to the specific lighting control system.

G. Commissioning Dongles: Provide ten (10) spare commissioning dongle devices for room controller, sensor, and relay programming when applicable to the specific lighting control system.

H. Lighting Control Software / Web Application Shortcut: Provide installation of software or setup of web app shortcuts on two (2) Owner provided computers when available and applicable to the specific lighting control system.

1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit project record documents under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Accurately record location of all controls and devices. Include description of switching sequences and circuiting arrangements.

1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit emerge
ncy, operation, and maintenance data under provisions of Section 26 0500. Data shall also include the following:

1. Schedule for routine maintenance, inspection, and calibration of all lighting control devices and system components. Recommended schedule for inspection and recalibration of sensors.

2. Complete narrative describing intended operation and sequence for each control scenario and system component, updated to reflect all changes resulting from commissioning of systems.

Narrative shall indicate recommended settings for devices where applicable.

3. Replacement part numbers for all system components.

B. Identify installed location and labeling for each luminaire controlled by automated lighting controls.

C. Submit software operating and maintenance manuals, program software backup on compact disc or compatible media with data files, device address list, and a printout of software application and graphic screens, where applicable.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-4

1.10 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Statement: The specification section and lighting design documents describe the minimum material quality, required features, and operational performance requirements of the lighting control system. The documents do not convey every component, relay, wire, and equipment connection required. The Contractor and lighting control manufacturer/vendor are solely responsible for determining all system components, wiring, and programming required for a complete and operational system based on the performance based requirements of the documents.

B. Lighting Sequence Of Operation (SOO): The Sequence Of Operation (SOO) describes the required lighting control operation and performance in each space. The Sequence Of Operation descriptions are included on the drawings.

C. Drawings: The drawings include the Sequence Of Operation (SOO), luminaire schedule, location of control devices, sensors, and identification of control zones, and branch power circuiting. Control wiring and manufacturer/vendor specific components are NOT shown, but shall be submitted with the shop drawing submittals.

1.11 COMMISSIONING
A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process.

Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative Architect/Engineer and the Commissioning Agent. Project closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commi
ssioning procedures, documentation, and issue closure. Refer to Division 1 for detailed commissioning requirements.

B. This project will have selected building systems commissioned. The Contractor is responsible to execute commissioning. The commissioning process, equipment, and systems to be commissioned are defined in Division 1.

C. The Contractor shall notify the Commissioning Agent, Architect/Engineer and Owner's Representative ten (10) working days prior to scheduled commissioning date.

D. The commissioning process requires meeting attendance. Refer to Division 1 for meeting requirements.

E. The system shall be functionally tested by a factory-authorized engineer and comply with the Sequence of Operation prior to system commissioning. All loads shall be tested live for continuity and freedom from defects, and all control wiring shall be tested for continuity and connections prior to energizing the system.

1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warrant products under normal use and service to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of commissioning.

B. Occupancy, vacancy, daylight sensors and controls shall have a five (5) year warranty from date of Substantial Completion.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTING CONTROL OVERVIEW
A. Lighting Control System: As defined in the System Description, the design documents describe the operational performance requirements of the lighting control system. The Lighting Control System has been categorized into the following groups. Refer to the Electrical Symbol Key, this specification section, and the drawings to determine the appropriate lighting control category when more than one is applicable to the project:

1. Room-Based Lighting Controls: Integrated system comprised of switch stations, sensors, room controllers, control panels, and accessories, operating at line and/or low voltage, configured as an integrated overall 'intelligent' lighting control system. Lighting control zones and power circuits commonly align.

B. All system components and materials of similar function (e.g., switches, dimmers, sensors, contactors, relays, etc.) shall be of the same manufacturer, unless specifically stated otherwise on drawings or elsewhere in the specifications. Lighting control switches, systems, and components shall be listed.

C. The functions described in the lighting sequence of operation shall dictate the actual lighting control device required to accomplish the functions described for the space, unless otherwise noted.

2.2 DEVICE COLOR AND COVERPLATES
A. All switches and lighting controls shall be complete with coverplates that match material and color of the wiring device coverplates in the space. When the coverplate is proprietary to the device/manufact
urer and do not match the wiring device coverplates, the architect shall select the coverplate color and materials from the standard coverplate options.

B. Where several devices are ganged together, the coverplate shall be of the ganged style for the number of devices used.

C. Install nameplate identification as indicated in Section 26 0553.

D. Plate-securing screws shall be metal with head color matching the wall plate finish.

2.3 STANDALONE LINE AND LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROLS
A. Overview:

1. Wall Switches and Wall Dimmers:
a. UL listed with integral air-gap switch for on/off control, integral EMI/RFI suppression, non-viewable heat sink, dimmer to match device color.
b. Dimmer compatibility and wiring with the load being controlled shall be verified by Contractor prior to purchase and installation.

B. SW-1P; Single Pole Switch:

1. Single throw, 120/277-volt, 20-amp maintained contact. Toggle handle, side and back wired.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-6

2. Manufacturers:
a. Hubbell HBL1221
b. Pass & Seymour PS20AC1
C. SW-1P-DJ; Door Jamb Push Button Switch:

1. Door jamb switch, 120V 3A Single pole, momentary, metal pushbutton, with jamb box, and cover plate. Light on when door is open

2. Manufacturers:
a. Leviton 1865
b. Hubbell, Cooper
D. SW-3W; Three-way Switch:

1. Single throw, 120/277 volt, 20 amp. Toggle handle, side and back wired.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Hubbell 1223
b. Pass & Seymour PS20AC3
E. SW-O; Dual Technology Occupancy Sensor with Wall Switch (Standalone):

1. Wall switch with manual on/auto/off. 120/277 VAC load rating of 0-800 W for ballast, LED or tungsten. 5-, 15-, 20-minute adjustable OFF delay. Dual technology ultrasonic/acoustic and PIR coverage of minor motion in 12' x 15' pattern and occupancy detection in area based on half-step walking motion. Sensitivity adjustments separate for each sensing technology.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Hubbell LHMTS
F. SW-O2; Dual Technology Occupancy Sensor with Dual Button Wall Switch (Standalone):

1. Multi-relay wall switch with manual on/auto/off for two separate loads. 120/277 VAC load relay rating of 0-800 W for ballast, LED or tungsten. 5-, 15-, 20-minute adjustable OFF delay. Dual technology ultrasonic/acoustic and PIR coverage of minor motion in 12' x 15' pattern and occupancy detection in area based on half-step walking motion. Sensitivity adjustments separate for each sensing technology.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Watt Stopper DW-200 Series
b.

Leviton OSSMD Series
G. SW-DO; Dimmer - Occupancy / Vacancy Sensor Dual Technology (Standalone):

1. Contractor / vendor to provide dimmer based on rating required, compatible with wiring, lighting load being controlled. Verify compatibility with luminaire shop drawings prior to light control prior to purchase and installation.

2. Occupancy orVacancy Dimmer with manual on/auto/off, dual technology ultrasonic/acoustic and PIR120/277 volt, automatic on/off, 0-10 V control. 120/277 V - 700 watt electronic ballast rated. Mounted in dedicated backbox.
a. Ratings/Manufacturers: Compatible with Luminaire Driver IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-7
1) Acuity nLight Series
2) Hubbell LightHawk Series
3) Sensor Switch WSX D Series
H. SW-OC-# and SW-VC-#; Occupancy / Vacancy Sensors (Standalone):

1. Combination Devices: Subscripts identify combination type devices when applicable. The contractor shall provide the combination device or provide multiple device(s) to meet the functionality when the manufacturer does not offer the required functionality with a single device. Manufacturer verified layouts shall include a 20% overlap of coverage patterns.

2. Subscripts: Subscripts are used to define the device type. a. Blank (or D) = Dual Technology
b. A = Ultrasonic two-sided corridor coverage
c. P = Passive infrared
d. P2 = Passive infrared 100 degree coverage
e. U = Ultrasonic 360 degree coverage
f. HA = Highbay aisle coverage
g. HB = Highbay
h. W = Wireless with battery, 10 year minimum

3. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate power supply/relay unit.
a. Operation - Occupancy: Occupancy sensors turn lights 'on' when covered area is occupied and turn lights 'off' with a time delay when unoccupied, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Operation - Vacancy: Vacancy sensors require a manual switch operation to turn lights 'on' with a time delay when occupied to turn lights 'off'. c. Time Delay 'Off': Field adjustable with a minimum range of 1-20 minutes. d. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay
unit.
e. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20 A ballast load at 120 and 277 VAC, for 13-amp tungsten at 120 VAC, and for 1 hp at 120 VAC. Power supply to sensor shall be 24 V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by Electrical Code. f. Mounting:
1) Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. 2) Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. Mount relay above accessible ceiling near entry door to room or area.
3) Time Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed.

4. Indicator: LED to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor.

5. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.

6. Power Supply and Child Packs: Provide as required for sensor quantity and switching scheme. Mount to standard 1/2" knockout on electrical box above accessible ceiling near entry door to room or area. Sensor power shall be from emergency circuit if emergency lighting is in the area.

7. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in an area based on hand motion.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-8

2.4 ROOM-BASED LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM ('INTELLIGENT CONTROLS) A. Manufacturers: Manufacturers as listed below meet the qualifications as outlined in this specification. Contractor is responsible for verifying that selected manufacturer is capable of furnishing the complete system as specified herein.

1. Acuity Controls nLight Series

2. Cooper Wavelinx Series

3. Legrand Watt Stopper DLM Series
B. Room-Based Lighting Control System Description: The room-based lighting control system is a distributed network of devices, components, and accessories for lighting controls and integrated control with other systems. The system includes system room controllers (network hubs), control stations, sensors (occupancy, vacancy, daylighting, etc.), switching/dimming modules, programming, 365/7 day scheduling, and associated wiring.

C. The lighting control system manufacturer shall be responsible to assure coordination and network compatibility between all system devices, components, and accessories.

D. Global System Typography: The system shall be provided with the following global system characteristics. When multiple exclusive options are listed the manufacturer/vendor may submit a system based on either criterion unless otherwise noted. When the drawings identify a specific option (typically identified with a subscript) provide the specific option as scheduled on the drawings. (Example, a control station (SW-#B) shown with a "W" subscript on the plans shall be provided in a wireless configuration regardless if the following specification descriptions allow both low voltage
or wireless network.)

1. System Controllers (Room Controllers): Room-based controllers located above accessible ceilings.

2. Interior Lighting Control System Network Connectivity for System Devices, Components, and Accessories: Low voltage cabling or wireless network.

3. Power Source for System Devices, Components, and Accessories: AC power pack supply or 10 year replaceable battery.

E. Lighting Control System (Room-Based Controller):

1. Lighting Control System Room-Based Controller: Provide with data network to all lighting control system components, devices, and accessories. Provide network interface with other systems via BACnet IP communication or alternative protocol acceptable to the other system.

System communication protocol shall be compatible with the building automation system.

F. Time Clock and Scheduling: Provide 24 astronomical hour-based scheduling for interior lighting controls.

G. Room-Based System Controllers (Room Controllers): Distributed room-based controller, integral switching relays and dimmers, network connected.

1. Installation: Provide a dedicated controller for each space; not shared with adjacent rooms.

Locate the controller near the associated wall controller, near the entry door when applicable, and above the finished accessible ceiling. As an alternative, the controller may be mounted above the finished accessible ceiling of the adjacent space when the associated ceiling space is not accessible. Example, located in adjacent corridor.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-9
H. Programming and Commissioning Dongle (Removable Style): Provide and permanently install a programming dongle for each room controller when a field removable dongle type device is required for programming and commissioning of the system. The programming dongle shall be permanently installed to allow for ease of programming the controller without above ceiling access.

I. Interior Lighting - Wireless Network: A wireless mesh network is an acceptable lighting control option when included in the list of acceptable Global System Typography descriptions listed above.

Provide and field coordinate wireless antennas (or room controllers) based on manufacturer requirements and field conditions. The system shall allow room controllers, control stations, sensors, and other components of the system to remain functional based on previous programing criteria if the wireless network is lost. Example, Wireless lighting control networks are commonly configured between sensors, control stations, devices, components, and other accessories and room controllers or system antennas. Room controllers and system antennas are commonly connected via low-voltage cabling or a mesh wireless network. Wireless systems without a mesh network protocol are not acceptable.

J. Control Devices: All occupancy, vacancy sensors (ultrasonic, PIR, dual technology, daylighting, photocell, timers), control stations, and other system components shall be provided with the system and designed to operate on system network. Sensors shall be powered from power supplies, modules, packs, or Power Over Etherne
t POE.

K. Power Supplies (Modules, Packs, etc.): Provide power supplies for control devices. Power supply shall provide physical separation of 120/277 volt line voltage wiring and low voltage control wiring. Provide supplementary power supplies when required for multiple control devices. Provide switch or dimmed control as required by the Sequence Of Operation SOO.

1. Installation: Install adjacent to wall room controller when applicable, near the entry door when applicable, and above the finished accessible ceiling. As an alternative, the controller may be mounted above the finished accessible ceiling of the adjacent space when the associated ceiling space is not accessible. Provide low voltage wiring to applicable control devices and control stations.

L. Device Relays: Mechanically held unless otherwise indicated; split-coil, momentary-pulsed type, rated 20 A, 125-volt AC for tungsten filaments and 20 A, 277-volt AC for electronic ballasts, minimum 50,000 cycles at rated capacity. Provide supplemental relays when required. (Example, occupancy sensor control of receptacle outlets or VAV/TAB HVAC units located in the same space.)

1. Receptacle Outlet Control: Provide auxiliary relay to control receptacle outlets located in the space control space. Refer to the drawings and sequence of operati on schedule for
requirements.

M. SW-#B; Lighting Control Station, Default Dimming Control Raise/Lower/Fade: The lighting control station shall comply with the performance requirements of the lighting sequence of operation. The control station may consist of switches, pushbuttons, sliders, dimming functions, etc.

Provide a common coverplate for lighting control stations.

1. #B: The '#' indicates the minimum quantity of unique lighting control scenes when shown plus raise/lower and lights 'off' scene. Refer to the Lighting Sequence Of Operation (SOO) for the minimum quantity of scenes required (when a number is not designated) and a description of each control scene.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-10

2. Subscripts:
a. (BLANK) = Dimming Control (Default)
b. S = Switch Control
c. W = Wireless w/ battery
d. # = Unique ID when applicable

3. Manufacturer: Room-Based Lighting Controller Manufacturer:
a. Dimming (Blank) or Switch (S) Control Station: Modular, momentary pushbutton, with addressable capabilities to control the scene or luminaires assigned to the switch.

The switch shall be able to actuate the functions based on the described sequence of operation and intended functions.
1) Preset/fader stations shall operate using programmable buttons and/or faders as indicated on drawings.
2) Raise, Lower, Integral Fader Control: Provide control station with manual raise and lower fader control for each control zone of lighting control. Manual raise/lower shall be separate buttons from scene control; hold and dim scene control buttons not acceptable. Faders may be physical sliders or up/down buttons. Fader range shall provide continuous even dimming matching full range of dimmer specification.
3) Integral Pilot Light or LED: Indicate that controls are active or powered by being on continuously when powered or when pushbuttons are actuated. 4) Labeling of buttons and faders shall be engraved/screened by manufacturer, using approved text returned with shop drawing submittals. 5) Station control components shall be designed to operate standard default or custom system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re- assigned via direct
or network connection. Function options include: preset selection, manual mode, record mode, station lockout, raise/lower, macro, cue, and room join/separate.
6) Multiple stations (shown in same space): When multiple control stations are shown in the same space the sequence of operation shall be the same at all locations unless noted otherwise.
b. (W) Wireless Control Station - Portable:
1) Portable wireless IR or Bluetooth transmitter for remote control of lighting control panel. Transmitter shall have a minimum of four (4) scene controls with engraved names below each button.
2) Infrared receiver shall be recess mounted with an integral LED to indicate when signal has been received. Receiver shall operate reliably within a 40-foot distance.

N. Global Operational Sequences:

1. California Title 24 Automatic Demand Response ADR - Automated Utility Demand Response:
a. The lighting control system shall automatically reduce illumination lighting levels between 15 - 50%. Refer to the lighting sequence of operations and plans for a list of spaces associated with the demand response control and the reduction quantity.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-11
b. Demand Responsive Controls Communication:
1) A certified OpenADR 2.0a or OpenADR 2.0b Virtual End Node (VEN), as specified under Clause 11, Conformance, in the applicable OpenADR 2.0 Specification; or
2) Certified by the manufacturer as being capable of responding to a demand response signal from a certified OpenADR 2.0b Virtual End Node by automatically implementing the control functions requested by the Virtual End Node for the equipment it controls.
c. All demand responsive controls shall be capable of communicating using one or more of the following: Wi-Fi, ZigBee, BACnet, Ethernet, or hard-wiring. d. When communications are disabled or unavailable, all demand responsive controls shall continue to perform all other control functions provided by the control.

O. Additional Network-Based Characteristics for Room-Based Control Systems: The following network-based lighting control system characteristics and capabilities shall be provided with the room-based lighting control system. The following ADDITIONAL requirements supplement the system description included above.

1. Additional Remote / Cloud System Access Requirements: Custom graphical digital twin of facility floorplans including all spaces, room names with representation of individual luminaires, sensors and other system components.

2. Additional System Controllers (Room Controllers) Options for Networks: Room-based controllers located above accessible ceilings.

3. Additional Time Clock and Scheduling Requirements: Astronomical based scheduling for exterior site controls. Provide 365/7 day scheduling, with holiday events, with custom events, with on/off master override.

4. Additional NETWORK: Room-Based Lighting Control with Network:
a. The independent room-based control systems shall be connected via a system network.

The following requirements supplement the room-based requirements listed above. b. Monitoring and Reporting: Provide monitoring and historical reporting of system events and components via password secured server or cloud-based interface. c. Master Remote Control: Provide control of devices, components, accessories for scheduling timeouts, and light blink notifications.

5. Additional Master Lighting Control System / Room-Based Controllers / Centralized Control Panels - Network Mesh and Independent Operation: The system network shall allow distributed room-based controllers and centralized control panels to continue local control station functionality and previously scheduled events if disconnected from the master system network. Sensors, wall stations, devices, components, and accessories supported by the local room controllers and centralized control panels shall also remain functional based on previously programmed criteria.

Lighting Load Load A Load B
Step 1: On Off
Step 2: Off On
Step 3: On On
Step 4: Off Off
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-12
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule a pre-construction meeting with the controls representative, installing contractor, Architect/Engineer, and Owner to explain the proposed lighting control system and integration with other systems as when applicable per the design documents.

3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify field dimensions and coordinate physical size of all equipment with the architectural requirements of the spaces into which they are to be installed. Allow space for adequate ventilation and circulation of air.

C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.

D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. All wiring shall be installed in conduit. Class II low voltage control wiring may be open wiring and shall maintain 6 inch spacing from electronic ballast and other RFI/EMI sources.

C. Low Voltage Cabling (less than 100 volts): Low voltage lighting control cabling shall be plenum listed. Low voltage cables in non-accessible areas shall be installed in conduit. Low voltage lighting control cable may be installed without conduit in accessible areas using the following types of cable supports. Cable support types/systems shall comply with the warranty requirements of the low voltage cable manufacturer.

1. J-hooks; batwing type.

2. Bridle rings with saddle supports.

3. Low voltage cable batwings supported by independent luminaire support systems (luminaire support cabling); use of batwings on ceiling support systems not allowed.

4. Listed cable ties. Low voltage cabling secured to exterior of luminaire power raceway.

D. All branch load circuits shall be live tested before connecting the loads to the lighting control panel.

E. Lighting Control Panel Directories: Provide a typewritten directory for each lighting control panel indicating relay/dimmer and description of load controlled.

3.4 BRANCH CIRCUIT POWER WIRING FOR CONTROLLERS

1. Branch circuit power for the following lighting control system components shall be provided from the following branches. Lighting control power shall originate from the same branch circuits serving the controlled luminaires:
a. Lighting Control System (Physical Server, Central Station, or Cloud-based Access):

Emergency (Electrical Code Article 700)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-13
b. Room controllers, lighting control power supplies, devices, components, and accessories when an associated (ALCR) device is applicable to the lighting control sequence of operation: Emergency (Electrical Code Article 700) c. Room controllers, lighting control power supplies, devices, components, and accessories when an associated (BCELTS) device is applicable to the lighting control sequence of operation: The load side of the BCELTS device normal and emergency/life safety pending the status of the BCELTS. d. The contractor shall coordinate the branch circuit power source required with the Engineer when required for unique lighting control system devices, components, and accessories.

3.5 LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING CONTROL CABLING
A. Control Cable Raceway Routing: Class II low voltage control wiring may be open wiring, independently supported, and shall maintain 150 mm (6 inch) spacing from luminaire drivers and other RFI/EMI sources.

B. Control Cabling Installed with Line Voltage Wiring: When low voltage control cabling is installed with line-voltage wiring, the control wiring shall be, copper conductors, minimum 16 AWG or per manufacturer, with cable insulation equal to the line-voltage rating (voltage, temp rating, etc.) and comply with Specification Section 26 0513 "Wire and Cable." C. Network Cabling: As required by manufacturer.

D. Splices and Taps: Tapping or wire trap connectors shall be used to splice all Class 1 and Class 2 control
wiring. Twist-on, wire-nut type connectors are not allowed.

3.6 SUPPORT SERVICES
A. System Startup:

1. Manufacturer shall provide factory authorized technician to confirm proper installation and operation of all system components.

B. Pre-Program, Testing, Training Coordination:

1. The construction documents and sequence of operations define the original design intent of the lighting controls as coordinated between the owner and the design team. The definition of the scope is intended to identify the hardware and programming flexibility required prior to programming, system testing, and owner training.

2. The final system programming, control station labels, scene presets, dimmer presets, dimmer range limits, fade times, etc. are subject to on site coordination between the design team, owner, contractor, and manufacturer. Contractor/manufacturer programming of the system prior to an onsite coordination with the owner and design team shall not be considered final programming nor commissioning.

3. The contractor and manufacturer shall provide on site representatives to provide final programming including preset, scene, switch labeling, and other programming adjustments based on owner and design team onsite observation and verbally requested adjustments as part of the based bid scope of work.

4. The contractor shall document onsite requested changes and update operation and maintenance manuals to match final programmi
ng.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-14
C. Testing:

1. System shall be completely functional tested by a factory-authorized technician. All loads shall be tested live for continuity and freedom from defects, and all control wiring shall be tested for continuity and connections prior to energizing the system components.

2. Programming of initial zones, schedules, lighting levels, control station groups, and sensor settings shall be performed by a factory-authorized technician. Lighting Control Sequence of Operation shall serve as a basis for programming, However, all final decisions regarding groups and schedules shall be at the direction of the Owner. The following procedures shall be performed at a minimum:
a. Confirm occupancy sensor placement, sensitivity, and time delay settings to meet specified performance criteria.
b. Confirm daylight sensor placement, sensitivity, deadband, and delay settings to meet specified performance criteria.
c. Confirm that schedules and time controls are configured to meet specified performance criteria and Owner's operating requirements.
d. Confirm control station labeling, presets, switch labels, and scenes.

3. Verify occupancy/vacancy and daylight sensor operation is correct after furniture and equipment is installed in each area. Make adjustments to sensor settings and time delays to allow proper operation.

4. Verify occupancy/vacancy sensors are located to provide complete coverage for the area served with no nuisance switching.
a. Relocate sensors or provide additional sensors as necessary to provide adequate coverage.
b.

Mask occupancy sensors where necessary to prevent nuisance switching from adjacent areas.

D. Training:

1. Manufacturer shall provide competent factory-authorized technician to train Owner personnel in the operation, maintenance and programming of the lighting control system.

Submit training plan with notification seven (7) days prior to proposed training dates.

2. Training duration shall be no less than three (3) days, with one (1) day being scheduled at least two (2) weeks after initial training.

E. Documentation:

1. Manufacturer shall provide system documentation including:
a. System one-line showing all panels, number and type of control stations and sensors, communication line, and network or building automation system BAS interface unit. b. Drawings for each panel showing hardware configuration and numbering. c. Panel wiring schedules.
d. Typical diagrams for each component.

3.7 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
A. Contractors' tests shall be scheduled and documented in accordance with the commissioning requirements. Refer to Section 01 0900, General Commissioning, for further details.

C. System verification testing is part of the commissioning process. Verification testing shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed and documented by the Commissioning Agent. Refer to Section 01 0900, General Commissioning, for system verification tests and commissioning requirements.

D. Training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner's Representative. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with the Owner's Representative after submission and approval of formal training plans. Refer to Section 01 0900, General Commissioning, for Contractor training requirements.

END OF SECTION 26 0933
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 0933-16
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION 26 2000-1
SECTION 26 2000 - SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Arrangement with Utility Company for permanent electric service.

B. Underground service entrance

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS AND WORK
A. Refer to the One-Line Diagram for additional information.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Utility Company: .SMUD - Sacramento Municipal Utility District B. Install service entrance in accordance with Utility Company's rules and regulations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Submit Utility Company prepared drawings (if applicable).

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, three phase, four-wire, 60 Hertz.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METERING EQUIPMENT
A. Meter: Furnished by the Utility Company.

B. Metering Transformer Compartment: Furnished as part of the main switchboard to Utility Company's specifications.

2.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide a permanent plaque or sign denoting all services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying the building or structure and the area served by each. Install plaque or sign at each service disconnecting means.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Primary conduit shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor, as shown on the drawings, to the Utility Company's requirements.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION 26 2000-2
B. Underground: Install service entrance conduits in concrete envelope from Utility Company's pad mounted transformer to meter cabinet and building service entrance equipment.

END OF SECTION 26 2000
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PANELBOARDS SECTION 26 2416-1
SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Service and distribution panelboards: DP-#, DP-#
B. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards: Panel '###'

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS AND WORK
A. Refer to the Electrical Distribution Diagram and Electrical Schedules for size, rating, and configuration.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers
B. NEMA FU 1 - Low voltage cartridge fuses
C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches
D. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards
E. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less
F. NEMA PB 1.2 - Application Guide for Ground-fault Protective Devices for Equipment G. UL 248 - Low-Voltage Fuses
H. UL 67 - Panelboards

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for equipment and component devices under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.

C. Arc Energy Reduction Documentation: Submit documentation to demonstrate the arc energy reduction system is set to operate at a value below the available arcing current.

D. Submit manufacturer's instructions under provisions of Section 26 0500.

1.5 SPARE PARTS
A. Keys: Furnish four (4) each to the Owner.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PANELBOARDS SECTION 26 2416-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RATINGS
A. Definitions:

1. Fully rated equipment shall be defined as equipment where all devices in that equipment shall carry a minimum of the AIC rating that is specified.

B. The panelboards for this project shall be fully rated unless otherwise specifically noted in the Drawings or Specifications.

2.2 MAIN AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. General

1. Manufacturers:
a. Square D QMB, I-Line
b. ABB ReliaGear neXT
c. Siemens F2, P4
d. Eaton PRL4, PRL5
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; type as shown on the drawings.

C. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1.

D. Provide cabinet front with concealed trim clamps and hinged trim on door to allow access to wiring gutters without removal of trim and flush lock. Door hardware shall provide swing clear operation (180-degree swing). Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

E. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings as scheduled on the drawings. Provide copper ground bus in all panelboards.

F. All spaces shown on the one-line diagram shall be fully prepared spaces for future breakers.

G. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 100,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240-volt panelboards; or as shown on the drawings.

H. Suitable for use as service entrance equipment. Provide line side (service style) barriers.

2.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. General

1. Manufacturers:
a. Square D NQ, NF
b. ABB ReliaGear Series
c. Siemens P1
d. Eaton PRL1, PRL2
B. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; circuit breaker type.

C. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PANELBOARDS SECTION 26 2416-3
D. Provide cabinet front with door-in-door construction, concealed hinge, and flush lock all keyed alike. Door hardware shall provide swing clear operation (180-degree swing). Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

E. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings as scheduled on the drawings. Provide copper ground bus in all panelboards.

F. All unlabeled circuits shown on the panelboard schedule shall be fully prepared spaces for future breakers.

G. All multiple-section panelboards shall have the same dimensional back box and cabinet front size.

H. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: As shown on the drawings.

I. Provide handle lock-on devices for all breakers serving exit sign and lighting circuits with emergency battery units. Provide handle lock-on devices and red handles for breakers serving fire alarm panels.

J. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits. Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled on the drawings. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

K. Suitable for use as service entrance equipment. Provide line side (service style) barriers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards plumb as indicated on the drawings in conformance with NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Height: 6 feet to handle of highest device.

C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.

D. Provide custom typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Label shall include equipment name or final approved room name, room number, and load type for each circuit (examples: SUMP SP-1 or ROOM 101 RECEPT). Revise directory to reflect circuit changes required to balance phase loads. Printed copies of the bid document panel schedules are not acceptable as circuit directories.

E. Stub five (5) empty one-inch conduits to accessible location above ceiling out of each recessed panelboard.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 PANELBOARDS SECTION 26 2416-4
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses.

END OF SECTION 26 2416
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 2726-1
SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Device plates and box covers
B. Receptacles (REC-#)
C. Poke-through fittings (PT-#)

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide similar devices from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in the Electrical Code, by a testing agency to Authorities Having Jurisdiction and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with the Electrical Code.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. DSCC W-C-896F - General Specification for Electrical Power Connector B. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet C. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
F. CEC California Electrical Code
G. UL 498 - Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles H. UL 943 - Standard for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturer's instructions.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 2726-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DEVICE COLOR
A. All switch, receptacle, and outlet colors shall be verified with Architect, unless indicated otherwise.

2.2 COVERPLATES
A. All switches, receptacles, and outlets shall be complete with the following:

1. Unbreakable thermoplastic/thermoset plastic and match device color coverplates in finished spaces where walls are finished.

2. Decorator Grade - Public: Decorator thermoset plastic and match device color wallplates in public finished spaces where walls are finished.
a. Manufacturer:
1) Leviton Decora
2) Hubbell Decorator
3) Cooper Decorator
4) or approved equal

3. #302 stainless steel coverplates in unfinished spaces for flush boxes.

4. Galvanized steel coverplates in unfinished spaces for surface mounted boxes.

B. Where several devices are ganged together, the coverplate shall be of the ganged style for the number of devices used.

C. Install nameplate identification as indicated in Section 26 0553.

D. Plate securing screws shall be metal with head color matching the wall plate finish.

2.3 RECEPTACLES
A. Refer to Electrical Symbols List for device type.

B. REC-DUP: NEMA 5-20R Duplex Receptacle:

1. Spec Grade: 125-volt, 20 amp, 3-wire grounding type with impact resistant thermoplastic face and brass back strap.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell 5352
2) Leviton 5362-S
3) Pass & Seymour 5362
4) Cooper 5362
C. REC-DUP-GFI: NEMA 5-20R Ground Fault Duplex Receptacle:

1. Standard Grade: 125-volt, 20 amp, 3-wire grounding type with test and reset buttons in impact resistant thermoplastic face,
listed.
a. Device shall perform self-test of GFCI circuitry in accordance with UL 943.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 2726-3
b. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell GF20L
2) Leviton GFNT2
3) Pass & Seymour 2097
4) Cooper SGF20
D. REC-DUP-WP: NEMA 5-20R Weatherproof Ground Fault Duplex Receptacle:

1. 125-volt, 20 amp, 3-wire grounding type with test and reset buttons in impact resistant thermoplastic face, weather resistant WR listed. Provide extra-duty NEMA 3R rated while-in-use clear cover.

2. Device shall perform self-test of GFCI circuitry in accordance with UL 943. a. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell:
a) GFTWRST20 with clear housing RW57300
b) GFCI type devices are not allowed. Contractor may substitute an alternative manufacturer when Hubbell is the basis of submittal for all other wiring devices. 2) Leviton GFWT2 with clear housing 5977-CL
3) Pass & Seymour 2097TRWR with clear housing WIUC10-C
4) Cooper WRSGF20 with clear housing WIU-1
E. REC-DUP-O: NEMA 5-20R 2121 Receptacle:

1. 125-volt, 20 amp, 3-wire grounding type with impact resistant thermoplastic face and brass back strap. Top half of duplex shall be split circuit wired and controlled by remote relay. Controlled receptacle shall have permanent NEMA approved and Electrical Code compliant marking on face of device. a. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell BR20C1
2) Leviton 5362-1P
3) Pass & Seymour 5362SCCH*
4) Eaton 5362CH
F. REC-SIM-630R: NEMA 6-30R Simplex Receptacle:

1. 250-volt, 30 amp, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding type with thermoplastic face. a. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell HBL9330
2) Leviton 5372
3) Pass & Seymour 3801
4) Cooper 5700N
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 2726-4
G. REC-TAMP: NEMA 5-20R Tamper Resistant Duplex Receptacle:

1. Standard Grade: 125-volt, 20 amp, 3-wire grounding type with impact resistant thermoplastic face. a. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell BR20TR
2) Leviton TBR20
3) Pass & Seymour TR5362
4) Cooper TRBR20
H. REC-TAMP-GFI: NEMA 5-20R GFI Tamper Resistant Receptacle:

1. Standard Grade: 125-volt, 20 amp, 3-wire grounding type tamper-resistant with test and reset buttons in impact resistant thermoplastic face, listed.
a. Device shall perform self-test of GFCI circuitry in accordance with UL 943. b. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell GFTR20
2) Cooper TRSGF20
3) Pass & Seymour 2097TR
4) Leviton GFTR2
I. REC-TAMP-QUAD: NEMA 5-20R Double Duplex Tamper Resistant Receptacle:

1. Consists of two duplex tamper resistant receptacles, double gang box, plaster ring and faceplate. a. Manufacturers:
1) Refer to Tamper Resistant Receptacle above.

J. REC-QUAD-O: NEMA 5-20R Plug Load Controlled Duplex Receptacle:

1. Consists of two plug load controlled duplex receptacles, double gang box, plaster ring and faceplate. a. Manufacturers:
1) Refer to Plug Load Controlled Duplex Receptacle above.

K. REC-QUAD: NEMA 5-20R Double Duplex Receptacle:

1. Consists of two duplex receptacles, double gang box, plaster ring and faceplate. a. Manufacturers:
1) Refer to Duplex Receptacle above.

L. REC-QUAD-GFI: NEMA 5-20R Double Duplex GFI Receptacle:

1. Consists of two duplex GFI receptacles, double gang box, plaster ring and faceplate.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 2726-5
a. Manufacturers:
1) Refer to Duplex GFI Receptacle above.

M. Back wired devices shall be complete with eight holes that are screw activated with metal clamps for connection to #12 or #10 copper conductors.

N. Side wired devices shall have four binding screws that are undercut for positive wire retention.

O. Ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles shall be listed and comply with UL 943 requiring increased surge immunity, improved corrosion resistance, improved resistance to false tripping and diagnostic indication for miswiring if the line and load conductors are reversed during installation.

P. Isolated ground receptacles shall have the equipment ground contacts connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device with inherent electrical isolation from the mounting strap.

2.4 POKE-THROUGH FITTINGS
A. Cover Color and Style: Verify with Architect; from custom options selected by Architect.

B. Refer to Technology drawings for voice/data, Audio/Video outlet, and coordination requirements.

C. UL listed as fire-rated poke-through device for 1, 2, 4-hour rated floors: include fire stops and smoke barriers in through-floor component. UL514A listed for scrub locations.

D. Terminate in 4-inch square by 2-1/2-inch deep junction box.

E. Suitable for installation with a floor thickness of 2-1/4 to 7 inches.

F. PT-1: 4" Fire Rated Poke-Through:

1. Semi-flush mounted, hinged covers, for use with 4-inch core holes, provide complete with appropriate outlet coverplates and hardware. UL 514 scrub rated listed.

2. Gang / Outlet Descriptions, route conduit in ceiling space of lower level. Provide provisions to core drill floor to route power circuits to panel on same floor as poke through. Route low voltage raceways to scheduled technology room:
a. 125 Volt, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacle.
b. Voice/Data outlet.
c. Audio/Visual outlet.
d. Power furniture/equipment feed with flexible whip.
e. Voice/Data furniture/equipment feed with flexible whip. f. Audio/Visual furniture/equipment feed with flexible whip. g. Spare.
h. Conduit Raceway (in ceiling space below floor):
1) Power: 3/4-inch conduit.
i. Refer to Technology drawings for additional information related to voice/data and audio/visual outlet requirements.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 2726-6

3. Manufacturers:
a. Hubbell SystemOne Series
b. Legrand Wiremold 4RF/RC Series
c. ABB Steel City FPT4 Series
G. PT-2: Concealed Center Service Fire-Rated Poke-Through:

1. Semi-flush mounted, concealed service center with pass through cable covers, for use with 4, 6, 8, 10-inch core holes, provide complete with appropriate outlet cover plates and hardware. UL 514 scrub rated listed. 2- hour fire rated.

2. Gang / Outlet Descriptions, route conduit in crawl space of lower level. Provide provisions to core drill floor to route power circuits to panel on same floor as poke through. Route low voltage raceways to scheduled technology room:
a. 125 Volt, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacle.
b. Voice/Data outlet.
c. Audio/Visual outlet.
d. Spare.
e. Conduit Raceway (in crawl space below floor):
1) Power: 3/4 -inch conduit.
f. Refer to Technology drawings for additional information related to voice/data and audio/visual outlet requirements.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Hubbell SystemOne Series
b. Legrand Wiremold Evolution Series
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install convenience receptacles at elevations indicated in the General Installation Notes on the contract drawings.

B. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on the contract drawings. Install devices level, plumb, and square with building lines. Coordinate installation of adjacent devices of separate systems with common mounting heights, including lighting, power, systems, technology, and temperature control device rough-ins.

C. Ground Fault Protection: Provide ground fault protect ion for all branch circuit breakers serving 120/208 receptacles and electrical outlets rated 50 amps or less single-phase and 100 amps or less three-phase in the following locations, as shown on drawings, or required by adopted code:

1. Bathrooms, locker rooms, shower rooms

2. Rooftops

3. Interior/Exterior locations subject to damp/wet conditions

4. When located within 6 feet of sinks, bathtubs, and shower stalls

5. Exterior dwelling outlets (disconnects, equipment connections, etc.) when required by code.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 2726-7

6. Specific Appliances: water drink/bottle fill coolers, pressure staying machines, vending machines, sump pumps
D. Tamper Resistant Protection: Provide tamper resistant protection for all 15 / 20-amp 120/208 straight blade wiring devices in the following locations, as shown on the drawings, or required by adopted code.

1. Common public areas

2. Public Buildings: Corridors, waiting rooms, common areas E. Drill opening for poke-through fitting installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. This Contractor is responsible for taking any measures required to ensure no conduits or other services are damaged. This may include X-ray or similar non-destructive means.

F. Install receptacles vertically with ground slot up or where indicated on the drawings, horizontally with ground slot to the left.

G. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas, using jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.

H. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface-mounted outlets.

I. Install devices and wall plates flush and level.

J. Install nameplate identification to receptacle cover plates indicated. Identification shall identify panel name and circuit number. Refer to Specification Section 26 0553 - Electrical Identification.

K. Test receptacles and modular wiring connectors for proper polarity, ground continuity and compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION 26 2726
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 26 2726-8
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FUSES SECTION 26 2813-1
SECTION 26 2813 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fuses
B. Spare Fuse Cabinet

1.2 REFERENCES
A. UL 198C - High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Types B. UL 198E - Class R Fuses
C. FS W-F-870 - Fuseholders (For Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses) D. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
F. CEC California Electrical Code

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 26 0500.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide two fuse pullers.

B. Provide three of each size and type of fuse installed.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40°F or more than 100°F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS - FUSES
A. Bussman, Division of Eaton
B. Edison Fuse, Division of Cooper Industries
C. Mersen
D. Littelfuse Inc
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 FUSES SECTION 26 2813-2

2.2 FUSES
A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.

B. Voltage: Provide fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.

C. Fuses with ratings less than or equal to 200 amperes (not including control transformer fuses):

Class RK-5, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses where indicated on the drawings and specifications.

B. Install fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.

C. Install fuses in packaged equipment as required by equipment manufacturer.

D. Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.

END OF SECTION 26 2813
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 26 2816-1
SECTION 26 2816 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fusible switches
B. Non-fusible switches
C. Motor disconnect switch
D. Enclosures

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS AND WORK
A. Refer to the Disconnect and Starter Schedule for rating and configuration.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breakers, accessory and component indicated, include dimensions, weights, and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, and ratings.

C. Electrical Characteristics: For each type of enclosed switch, enclosure types, current and voltage ratings, short-circuit current ratings, UL listing for series rating of installed devices, features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE AND NON-FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Square D 3110 Series

2. Eaton DH Series

3. ABB TH Series

4. Siemens HNF / HF Series
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 DISCONNECT SWITCHES SECTION 26 2816-2
B. FDS-; Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type heavy duty, quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position without a tool. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: Class 'R' fuse clips only, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.

C. DS-; Non-fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type heavy duty, quick-make, quick- break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position without a tool. Handle lockable in OFF position.

D. Enclosures: Type as indicated on the disconnect schedule.

E. Accessories: Provide the following accessories. Refer to Disconnect Schedule for additional requirements for each application.

1. Lockable

2. Provide finger safe barriers for exposed line-side terminations and energized components when the switch is in the open position.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on the drawings.

B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.

C. Field coordinate installation with other contractors and equipment to maintain code required working space requirements.

D. Provide adhesive label on inside door of each switch indicating UL fuse class and size for replacement.

3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker trip ranges.

END OF SECTION 26 2816
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LED LIGHTING SECTION 26 5119-1
SECTION 26 5119 - LED LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior luminaires and accessories
B. Exterior luminaires and accessories
C. Light-emitting diode (LED) luminaire systems
D. LED emergency lighting units
E. Emergency exit signs
F. Emergency inverter for LED light engines (individual luminaires - integral)

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The lighting system design includes a combination of luminaire sources, lighting control components, programming sequences, and supplementary components for building and energy code compliance. The design uses performance-based specifications for portions of the lighting system to account for the limitation of comparable product solutions available by competitive manufacturers. The Contractor shall reference related specification sections, plans, schedules, and details prior to submitting pricing, submittals, and installation. The Contractor shall coordinate system component compatibility among various manufacturers and suppliers for a turnkey lighting system. Referenced sections include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. 26 09 33 Lighting Control Systems

2. 26 52 15 Emergency Lighting Inverter

3. Electrical drawings: Plans, luminaire schedules, lighting control sequence of operations, diagrams, and details.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C78.377 - Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products B. ANSI C82.16 - Light-Emitting Diode Drivers - Method of Measurement C. ANSI C82.77 - Standard for Harmonic Emission Limits and Related Power Quality Requirements for Lighting Equipment
D. NFPA 70E - National Electrical Safety Code
E.

NEMA SSL1 - Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays or System F. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for use in Lighting Products G. LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products
IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LED LIGHTING SECTION 26 5119-2
H. LM-80 - Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED I. FS W-L-305 - Light Set, General Illumination (Emergency or Auxiliary) J. UL 924 - Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Basic Requirements of Submittal:

1. Submit product data sheets for luminaires, LED light engines, drivers and poles. Include complete product model number with all options as specified. Submittal shall be arranged with luminaires listed in ascending order, and with each luminaire's, LED light engine, driver, or pole information following luminaire's product data. Failure to organize submittal in this manner will result in the submittal being rejected.

2. Submit lens product data, dimensions and weights if not included in product data sheet submittal.

3. Include outline drawings, support points, weights, and accessory information for each luminaire.

4. Submit manufacturer origin of LED chipset and driver.

C. LED Lighting - Control Compatibility Submittal:

1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide extra stock under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. LED Light Engines or Modules: Five (5) percent of quantity installed, minimum one (1) of each size and type of field replaceable light engine or module. Provide field replacement installation instructions.

C. Lenses: Three (3) percent of quantity installed, minimum one (1) of each size and type.

D. LED Drivers: Five (5) percent
of quantity installed, minimum one (1) of each size and type.

E. Exit Signs: Provide Three (3) additional exit sign luminaires complete with labor, conduit, and wire. Additional exit luminaires shall be located per the Architect/Engineer or provided as attic stock when a location is not defined prior to Owner occupancy. When multiple exit signs are scheduled, the quantity listed above shall represent each type listed.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site. Store and protect under provisions of Section 26 0500.

B. Protect luminaire finishes, lenses, and trims from damage during storage and installation. Do not remove protective films until construction cleanup within each area is complete.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. The warranty period begins at the date of Substantial Completion.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LED LIGHTING SECTION 26 5119-3
B. LED Light Engines and Drivers:

1. LED Drivers and Dimming Drivers: Five (5) years

2. Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Engines: Five (5) years C. Emergency Lighting Units and Exit Signs:

1. Emergency Lighting Units: Three (3) year, non-prorated

2. Exit Signs: Three (3) year, non-prorated

3. Emergency Unit and Exit Sign Battery: Sealed lead acid or lead calcium cell, requiring no maintenance or replacement for ten (10) years under normal conditions.

D. Emergency Drivers:

1. Emergency LED Driver: Five (5) years
E. Emergency Inverter for LED Light Engines:

1. Emergency Inverter and Battery: Sealed nickel cadmium five (5) year, non-prorated.

1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 101 for installation requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES - GENERAL
A. Lensed Troffers: Provide hinged frames with latches and 0.125-inch thick virgin acrylic lenses.

Prismatic lenses shall have depth of no less than 0.080", KSH12 or equal. Other lenses as scheduled.

B. Recessed Luminaires: Confirm ceiling and wall type and furnish trim and accessories necessary to permit proper installation in each system. Where fire-rated ceiling or wall assemblies are specified, furnish and install listed enclosures around luminaires that maintain the system rating.

C. Luminaires: Louvers shall be anodized low iridescent specular aluminum with mitered corners and interlocking construction.

D. Suspended Luminaires: Coordinate power feed and suspension canopies with ceiling type and archit
ectural RCP for proper fit and location. Ensure finished installations are plumb and level at elevations specified. Verify suspension length prior to submittal.

E. Painted reflector surfaces shall have a minimum reflectance of 90%.

F. All painted components shall be painted after fabrication.

2.2 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES - GENERAL
A. Listed for wet or damp location as scheduled. Provide ingress protection (IP) rating when scheduled.

B. Provide low temperature LED drivers, with reliable starting to -20°F.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LED LIGHTING SECTION 26 5119-4
C. In-grade luminaires shall have lamp/optic separation to prevent surface temperature from exceeding 115°F. Compartment separation of wire entry and control gear/lamp chamber.

D. Exterior LED luminaires shall contain separate, easily accessible and replaceable Category C surge protection device.

2.3 LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) LUMINAIRE SYSTEMS
A. Refer to the luminaire schedule for color temperature and minimum color rendering index CRI requirements. Provide light source color consistency by utilizing a binning tolerance within a maximum 3-step McAdam ellipse unless noted otherwise.

B. LED chip arrays specified as color changing shall have chip colors as noted on the luminaire schedule.

C. Rated life shall be minimum of 50,000 hours at L70.

D. LED chips shall be wired so that failure of one chip does not prohibit operation of the remainder of the chip array.

E. Luminaire delivered lumens is defined as the absolute lumens per the manufacturers LM-79-08 test report.

F. LED luminaires shall be designed for ease of component replacement including modular replaceable boards or Zhaga sockets. Luminaires that are factory sealed and do not have field replaceable parts shall provide a 10-year warranty.

G. LED light engine shall have a maximum LLD of 0.80 at 50,000 hours at 25°C ambient.

H. LED Driver:

1. Solid state driver with integral heat sink. Driver shall have over-heat, short-circuit and overload protect
ion, power factor 0.90 or above and maximum total harmonic distortion of 10%. Driver shall have a voltage fluctuation tolerance of +/- 10%.

2. Drivers shall have dimming capabilities as outlined in the luminaire schedule for each luminaire type. Dimming shall control light output in a continuous curve from 100% to 10% unless noted otherwise.

3. Driver shall have a minimum of 50,000 hours rated life.

4. Driver shall be tested to ANSI C82-16 for input current inrush, total harmonic distortion (THD), and power factor. Driver start time shall be less than 0.5 seconds to 98% of initial light output. Flicker should be less than 30% throughout the operating range.

5. Driver shall be field replaceable without removal of the luminaire.

6. Class A sound rating; inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.

7. Demonstrate no visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10 percent change in line-voltage input.

2.4 LED EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. Self-Powered Emergency Lighting Units: One-piece, self-contained unit with sealed, maintenance-free nickel cadmium battery, automatic charger and electronic circuitry. Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automa
tically recharged and floated on charger.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LED LIGHTING SECTION 26 5119-5
B. Battery: Maintenance free lead calcium type, with 90 minute capacity to supply the connected lamp load.

C. Charger: Dual-rate solid state current limiting charger, capable of maintaining the battery in a full-charge state during normal conditions, and capable of recharging discharged battery to full charged within 168 hours. Low voltage disconnect to prevent deep discharge of battery.

D. LED Lamp Wattage: As scheduled on luminaire schedule.

E. Remote Lamps: Match LED lamps on unit.

F. Indicators: Provide lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING.

G. Provide test switch to transfer unit from normal supply to battery supply.

H. Electrical Connection: Knockout for conduit connection.

I. Unit Voltage: Refer to luminaire schedule volts, AC.

J. Self-Diagnostics and Testing:

1. Unit shall be self-diagnostic with continuous monitoring of charger performance and battery voltage. Any malfunction of battery, charger, transfer circuit, or emergency lamps shall be detected and visually indicated.

2. Unit shall be programmed to exercise the battery and test emergency operation by performing a five-minute discharge/diagnostic cycle every six months. A manual test switch shall allow a five-minute discharge/diagnostic test at any time.

2.5 EMERGENCY EXIT SIGNS
A. Self-Powered Exit Signs: Stencil face, 6-inch high letters, directional arrows as indicated, universal mounting type as indicated on the drawings. One-piece, self-contained unit with sealed, maintenance-free nickel
cadmium battery, test switch, AC ON pilot light, automatic charger, and electronic circuitry. Power failure relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

B. Directional Indicators: The directional indicator for exit signage shall be of a chevron type meeting all requirements of NFPA 101.

C. Self-Diagnostics and Testing:

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LED LIGHTING SECTION 26 5119-6

2.6 EMERGENCY INVERTER FOR LED LIGHT ENGINES (INDIVIDUAL LUMINAIRES -

INTEGRAL)
A. Unit: Self-contained, with automatic transfer to battery supply on loss of normal power, UL 924 listed for factory or field installation, indoor and damp locations, 32⁰F to 122⁰Foperating temperature. Compatible with switched, dimmed, and unswitched lighting controls. Compatible with LED light engines. The inverter output shall be sinusoidal with solid-state low voltage disconnect circuit.

B. Battery: Sealed, high temperature, maintenance free, nickel cadmium battery with capacity to provide 90 minutes of emergency operation at full lumen and wattage output, with 24-hour recharge time. Refer to Luminaire Schedule for lumen and wattage requirements.

C. Features: Integral battery charger with LED charging indicator light, test switch, electronic circuitry for use with LED drivers. Test and monitor switch shall be integral to luminaire.

D. Factory and Field Installation: Listed for installation inside and adjacent to luminaire. Refer to Luminaire Schedule for individual luminaire requirements. Remote-mounted units shall be located above finished ceiling, adjacent to luminaire, and accessible from below through luminaire opening.

E. Self-Test Diagnostics and Testing: Provide with listed automatic monthly self-test diagnostics.

F. Manufacturers:

1. Myers LVU Series
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Securely fasten luminaires to the listed and labeled ceiling framing member by mechanical means such as bolts, screws, rivets or listed clips identi fied for use with the type of ceiling
framing members. The architectural ceiling framing system may be used in lieu of independent support with prior written approval by the ceiling system manufacturer and Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Luminaires and wiring installed in fire-rated ceiling assemblies shall be independently supported for all applications.

1. Install recessed flanged luminaires to permit removal from below. Use manufacturer- supplied plaster frames and swing gate supports. Provide independent support as follows:
a. Luminaires less than 56 lbs: Provide a minimum of two (2) #12 gauge suspended ceiling support wires located on diagonal corners of the luminaires. b. Luminaires 56 lbs or greater: Provide a minimum of four (4) #12 gauge suspended ceiling support wires located on diagonal corners of the luminaires. Support luminaire independent of the ceiling system.
c. Luminaires larger than eight square feet (8 ft2): Support luminaire independent of the ceiling system.

B. Do not fasten luminaire supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit, unless otherwise noted. Support wires shall be tightly wrapped (minimum of three turns within 3 inches of the connection) and sharply bend to prevent vertical movement.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LED LIGHTING SECTION 26 5119-7
C. Support suspended or pendant mounted luminaires independent of ceiling grid with adjustable stainless steel aircraft cables or per luminaire schedule mounting requirements. Suspension assembly and anchors shall be capable of supporting 300 pounds dead load at each suspension point.

D. Support wire used to independently support luminaires, raceways, and wiring systems shall be distinguishable from ceiling support systems by color (field paint), tagging or equivalent means.

E. Provide seismic bracing of luminaires per IBC Chapter 16. Design pendant luminaires on a component seismic coefficient (Cc) of 0.67. Design vertical supports with a factor of safety of

4.0. Contractor shall verify the Seismic Hazard Exposure Group and Performance Criteria Factor.

F. Install lamps in lamp holders of luminaires.

G. Adjust aimable luminaires to obtain lighting levels on objects and areas as directed to obtain desired lighting levels.

H. Recessed luminaires and other optical accessories shall remain in protective wraps or films until construction in area is complete and area has been cleaned.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION USE OF PROJECT LUMINAIRES
A. The Contractor shall provide temporary construction lighting per the requirements of Division 1.

B. The project luminaires shown on the construction documents shall not be used for temporary construction purposes without providing a plan for Owner approval that addresses energy and luminaire operati
ng hours.

3.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS AND EXIT SIGNS
A. Install units plumb and level.

B. Aim directional lamp heads as directed.

C. Test emergency lighting equipment for 60 minutes to determine proper operation, prior to Substantial Completion. Provide electronic copy of periodic test log form to Owner's Representative. Explain and instruct Owner's Representative of requirements for testing and maintenance. Refer to latest adopted NFPA 101 for testing and logging requirements.

3.4 RELAMPING
A. Replace failed LED light engine modules or arrays at completion of work.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of work. Clean paint splatters, dirt, and debris from installed luminaires.

B. Touch up luminaire finish at completion of work.

IMEG CITY OF SACRAMENTO - Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission - November 01, 2024 LED LIGHTING SECTION 26 5119-8

3.6 OWNER TRAINING
A. Test emergency lighting equipment for 60 minutes to determine proper operation, prior to Substantial Completion, with the Owner's Representative.

B. Provide electronic copy of periodic test log form to Owner's Representative. Explain and instruct Owner's Representative of requirements for testing and maintenance. Refer to latest adopted NFPA 101 for testing and logging requirements.

3.7 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
A. As shown on the drawings.

END OF SECTION 26 5119
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-1 SECTION 27 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Provisions of this Section apply to Communications Work, including the following Sections:

1. Section 27 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

2. Section 27 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems

3. Section 27 05 33 – Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems

4. Section 27 05 36 – Cable Trays for Communications Systems

5. Section 27 05 39 – Surface Raceway for Communications Systems

6. Section 27 05 43 – Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems

7. Section 27 05 48 – Noise and Vibration Controls for Communications Systems

8. Section 27 05 53 – Identification for Communications Systems

9. Section 27 10 00 – Structured Cabling, Basic Materials and Methods

10. Section 27 11 16 – Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures

11. Section 27 11 19 – Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels

12. Section 27 11 23 – Communications Cable Management

13. Section 27 13 00 – Communications Interior Backbone Cabling

14. Section 27 14 00 – Communications Outside Plant Backbone Cabling

15. Section 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes, but is not necessarily limited to:

1. Common standards and procedures for the Communications Work. a. Design, engineer and provide complete, all means of support, suspension, attachment, fastening, bracing, and restraint (hereinafter "support") of the Work of this Division. Provide engineering of such support by parties licensed to perform work of this type in the Project jurisdiction.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-2

1. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises, 2009

2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, 2009

3. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard, published 2009

4. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, published 2008, plus errata issued in October, 2008.

5. ANSI/TIA-569-C (2012) Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

6. ANSI/TIA-606-B-2012, Administration Standard Telecommunications Infrastructure.

7. ANSI-J-STD-607-B, Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises.

8. ANSI/TIA-758-A, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard.

B. BICSI

1. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) - 12th edition.

2. BICSI - Outside Plant Design Reference Manual (OSPDRM) - 4th edition.

3. BICSI - Wireless Design Reference Manual (WDRM) - 3rd edition.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. See also Division 1.

B. General Abbreviations used in these specifications. Refer additionally to the abbreviations list appearing on the Drawings.

1. ADA Americans With Disabilities Act.

2. AFC Above Finished Ceiling.

3. AFF Above the Finished Floor.

4. BLDG Building

5. CAT Category

6. CL Centerline

7. DIV Division

8. (E) Existing

9. FBO Furnished By Owner, Furnished by City or Sacramento Public Library

10. HR Home Run

11. ID Inside Diameter
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-3

12. LAN Local Area Network

13. MAX Maximum

14. NIC Not In Contract.

15. OD Outside Diameter

16. PSRH Project Standard Receptacle Height.

17. PSSH Project Standard Switch Height.

18. TYP Typical

19. OFE City/Sacramento Public Library Furnished Equipment.

20. UON Unless Otherwise Noted.

C. Electrical and electronics terms used in the Communications Sections shall be as defined in:

1. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0

2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1

3. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2

4. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3

5. ANSI/TIA-569-C

6. ANSI/TIA-606-B

7. IEEE Std 100

8. This Section.

D. Building Distribution Facility (BDF) - A distributor in which the building backbone cables terminate and at which connections to the campus backbone cables may be made.

E. Intermediate Distribution Facility (IDF) - A distributor used to connect horizontal cable and cabling subsystems or equipment.

F. Telecommunications Room (TR) - The term TR refers to space allocated within a building to provide a secure operating environment for telecommunications cabling and termination facilities and/or network equipment. TRs shall be designed and provisioned per ANSI/TIA-569-C 5. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces and per the BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), most recent edition.

Depending on the building size, design, and network requirements, one or more of the functions of a TR may be combined into one space. The primary functions housed in TR’s are:

1. Entrance Facility (EF).

2. Building Distribution Frame (BDF).

3. Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF).

4. Area Distribution Frame (ADF).

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-4 G. Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications) Is a room that houses the termination and grounding point of OSP network service cables that enter or exit a building. It enables the joining of intra-building and inter-building backbone cabling. The EF is generally co- located in a BDF or ADF rather than being a separate room H. Entrance Room (ER) (Telecommunications) - A centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the occupants of a building. Equipment housed therein is considered distinct from a telecommunications room because of the nature of its complexity.

I. Open Cable - Cabling that is not run in a raceway as defined by NFPA 70. This refers to cabling that is open to the space in which the cable has been installed and is therefore exposed to the environmental conditions associated with that space.

J. Open Office - A floor space division provided by furniture, moveable partitions, or other means instead of by building walls.

K. Pathway - A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of telecommunications cable.

L. Reference to Named Products

1. Selected Item: Item so noted was selected based on comparative testing of similar products. Procedure for determination of equivalence is noted in the specification for the item(s).

2. System Design Basis: Item so noted interacts with other system items to produce total system function. Substitution of this item may require coordinated substitution of other system items.

3. Design Basis: Item so noted was used as basis for system drawings to establish features, size, etc. Use of specified equivalents may require adjustment of physical layout or wiring, but does not affect system function. No preference is implied.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following according to Conditions of the Construction Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. General Requirements

1. Submit all materials for review arranged in same order as Specifications, individually referenced to Specification Section, Paragraph and Contract Drawing number. Conform in every detail as applies to each referencing Section.

2. Submit 8 ½"x 11" items bound in volumes and drawings in edge bound sets.

Submit all drawings on sheets of the same size.

3. Make each specified submittal as a coordinated package complete with all information specified herein. Incomplete or uncoordinated submittals will be returned with no review action.

4. Progress Schedule: Comply with Division 1.

1. A minimum of 30 days prior to installation, submit documentation of the experience of the low voltage systems, equipment and infrastructure contractor(s) and of their key personnel.

2. Qualifications shall be provided for:
a. the low voltage systems, equipment and infrastructure contractor(s), b. the low voltage systems, equipment and infrastructure installers, c. and the supervisor(s) (if different from the installers).

3. A copy of the Contractor's C-7 license or C-10 licenses - both if Contractor has both.

4. A copy of testing personnel certification(s)that demonstrate that the proposed personnel have the necessary training and certifications to conform with the proof of performance testing requirements of this Division and that they are properly trained in the use of the testing equipment that will be employed by the contractor.

5. Copies of Contractor's Structured Cabling System (SCS) manufacturer's authorized vendor/installer Certification document(s).

6. Refer to Quality Assurance paragraph in this section for complete requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's Product Data Sheets. Collate in sequence of List of Materials:

2. Data sheet for each item in each Communications Section, including all accessories, clearly marked for proposed product.

3. Material Safety Data Sheet, where applies.

4. List of Materials Schedule. For each item, include:
a. Referencing Specification Section
b. Referencing Paragraph
c. Referencing Drawing, if specified only on plans
d. Manufacturer.
e. Model number.
f. Listing, including name of Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. g. Precede each submittal book with a summary schedule, with columns for each item above and rows for each item submitted, per the example schedule below:

Specificati
on Section
Paragra
ph
Contract
Drawing
Reference
Manufactu
rer
Model
No.

UL/ETL/
CLA
Listed
27 05 00 2.03C XYZ 123 Y
27 15 00 2.07A1 AAA 34-56 Y
T0.1 ZZY 456 Y
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-6 E. Field (Installation) Drawings:

1. General
a. Drawings shall present the proposed installation using the makes and models of devices proposed for use this project; replace vendor neutral nomenclature used in bid set with the actual part numbers to be installed or provide a lookup table in the drawings to permit determining the actual part number.
b. Where the existing systems and/or infrastructure are used and integrated into the work of the project, indicate them on drawings, including points of interface and demarcation of existing and new work.
c. Collate, in sequence, at least the following minimum drawings, for each infrastructure and system to be installed under the work of this contract:

2. Drawing index/symbol sheet.

3. Site plans, floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. a. General
1) The identifier for each termination and cable shall appear on the drawings, either directly on the floor plans, through an associated schedule or a unique identifier associated with a fully annotated single line diagram.
2) Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.
3) At scale of Contract Documents, show:
a) Device locations and type
b) Rough-in.
c) Mounting height.
d) Conduit size.
e) J-hook routes
f) Wire type.
g) Wire fill.
4) On the floor plans, indicate floor and wall mounted devices and pathway below a height of 7 feet above finish floor. Indicate the locations of the communications rooms and provide reference to the enlarged communications rooms plans.
5) On the reflected ceiling plan, indicate ceiling and wall mounted devices and pathway above a height of 7 feet above finish floor.

Indicate the locations of the communications rooms and provide reference to the enlarged communications rooms plans.
b. Communications Infrastructure
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-7 1) Provide registered communications distribution designer (RCDD) approved, drawings depicting a complete
communication infrastructure in accordance with ANSI/TIA- 606-B. The drawings should provide details required to prove that the distribution system shall properly support connectivity from the communications rooms including EF, ER, CD's, BD's, and FD's to the telecommunications work area outlets.
2) The following drawings shall be provided as a minimum:
a) T1- Layout of complete building per floor - Building Area/Serving Zone Boundaries, Backbone Systems, and
Horizontal Pathways. Layout of complete building per
floor. The drawing indicates location of building areas, serving zones, vertical backbone diagrams,
telecommunications rooms, access points, pathways,
grounding system, and other systems that need to be
viewed from the complete building perspective.
b) T-2 Serving Zones/Building Area Drawings - Drop
Locations and Cable Identification (ID’S). Shows a
building area or serving zone. These drawings show
drop locations, telecommunications rooms, access points and detail call outs for common equipment rooms and
other congested areas.
c) A complete jack numbered plan set in Sacramento
Public Library standard jack numbering format in
printed and AutoCAD format. Number plans with all
jacks for each floor indicated on a single drawing sheet.

Data, voice, wireless and security jacks shall appear on the same page. Symbols shall be indicated for the data, wall phone, wireless, inside camera, outside camera, as applies. A four digit jack numbers shall be printed by
each jack symbol. Jack plan shall be approved by the
City’s Representativebefore the cabling begins.
c. Audiovisual Systems, including MATV Systems, Audiovisual Systems and Public and Mass Notification Systems
1) Indicate:
a) Device locations, orientation and depict integration of systems that need to be viewed from the complete
building perspective.
b) For distributed speaker systems, indicate limits of zones of coverage.
c) Vertical and horizontal pathways
d) Equipment rooms and racks
e) Reference to enlarged plans and related details.

4. Enlarged Plans
a. General
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-8 1) Indicate at least as much information as is provided in the Contract Documents, supplemented by the dimensions and
arrangement of the proposed equipment, trade coordination and field conditions.
b. Communications Infrastructure.
1) Communications Rooms Drawings
a) Provide T3 drawings in accordance with ANSI/TIA-606- B that include telecommunications rooms plan views,
pathway layout (cable tray, racks, ladder-racks, etc.), mechanical/electrical layout, and cabinet, rack,
backboard and wall elevations. Include rack details,
proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and
appurtenances, and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and
operation.
b) At scale of Contract Documents, the Contractor shall submit scaled drawing elevations (showing dimensions,
mounting locations and associated frames & equipment)
for all required assemblies, including but not limited to:
(1) Rack locations
(2) Wall mounted plywood backboards
(3) Wall mounted backbone cabling and major
station cable bundles.
(4) Wall mounted and tray mounted splice cases
(5) Wall mounted copper cable protectors and
terminal blocks.
(6) Wall mounted fiber optic cable terminations.
(7) Clearances
(8) Backboard Wire and Cable Management
(9) Rack elevations, including
(10) Copper cable patch panels.
(11) Fiber optic cable patch panels.
(12) Rack mounted wire managers
(13) Hold clears for equipment provided by Others.
(14) Reference to mounting details.
(15) Power strips
(16) UPS
2) Drawings may also be an enlargement of a congested area of T1 or T2 drawings.
c. Audiovisual Systems, including MATV Systems, Audiovisual Systems and Public and Mass Notification Systems
1) At equipment rooms
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-9 a) Rack elevations, showing
(1) all equipment occupying the actual number of
rack units required
(2) blank panels
(3) vent panels
(4) aux panels
(5) power strips
(6) UPS
(7) Reference mounting details.

5. System Conduit and Riser Diagrams,
a. General:
1) Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the
interconnection between each item of equipment.
2) Single line diagram of structured wiring
3) Grounding and bonding scheme
4) Terminal cabinets.
5) Coordination with floor plans.
6) Wire runs not shown on floor plans.
7) Wire type.
8) Wire fill.
9) Interface to work provided by work of other Sections, City and/or Sacramento Public Library Furnished Equipment, existing equipment and/or future equipment.
10) For Audiovisual Systems, indicate digital or analog signal type and voltage levels (dBmV, microphone, line level, speaker level) or optical signal levels.

6. Detail Drawings
a. Identify each item requiring seismic restraint installation in accordance with CBC Chapter 16. Include floor mounted items weighing more than 400 pounds and wall mounted or suspended items weighing more than 20 pounds.
b. Supports for such items shall be provided support, bracing, and anchorage, designed by the Contractor in accordance with the following criteria:
1) Design to resist seismic forces in accordance with CBC Chapter

16. 2) Minimum Design Parameters - As defined for the Project in Division, with respect to Occupancy Category, Site
Classification, Seismic Design Category, Importance Factor, Spectral Acceleration and SDI.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-10 c. Mounting details:
1) Specific details of restraints including anchor bolts submitted under the Section 27 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for
Communications Systems for mounting and maximum loading at each location, showing compliance and coordination with Code and the project Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Documents.
2) Stamped and signed by an Engineer licensed in the Project jurisdiction for work of this type.
a) Submit an accompanying Engineering analysis stamped
and signed by an Engineer licensed in California for
work of this type, indicating that the Equipment
Enclosure System will comply with California Building
Code for the Project Seismic Zone when loaded with the
weight of the equipment submitted.
b) Show calculations on drawings or in bound volume for review by Authorities having jurisdiction.
3) Show loads, type and strength of connections, sizes, dimensions, materials, etc.
4) Provide details for:
a) Floor Mounted Equipment Cabinet and Rack anchorage.
b) Wall Mounted Racks and Enclosures anchorage,
including coordination with backing.
c) Cable Runway and Cable Tray. Indicate tray type,
dimensions, support points, and finishes.
d. For systems with contractor or manufacturer programmed control and human interfaces submit at least:
1) Narrative of the sequence of operation.
2) Color, full-size layouts of each touchpanel and/or computer screen (menu) image, cross-referenced to the sequence of operations.
3) Show chaining of sub-menus.
e. Faceplate and Receptacles
1) Receptacle and jack arrangement for each condition.
2) Labeling of receptacle/jacks and plate
3) Plate material.
4) Plate finish.
5) Connector types.
6) Connector dimensioned layout.
f. Pathway
1) Cable tray installation details, indicating complete system of fittings and radiussed pathways provided.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-11 2) Firestopping. Listed fire stop system documentation supporting proposed systems ability to conform with the project
requirements.
3) Penetrations. All conduit and piping wall, ceiling, floor, and roof penetrations, including both fire rated or non-rated, should be submitted for review prior to installation.
a) For cored penetrations through concrete partitions,
submit proposed work plan in the form of
Coring/Sawcutting Summary Description as described in
Section 27 05 33 – Conduits and Backboxes for
Communications Systems.
4) Details of flexible raceway connections to be made to vibrating equipment
5) Details of J-Box and sealant application for the typical conditions listed in Section 27 05 48 – Noise and Vibration Controls for Communications System, and a schedule of rooms to receive application of mastic and sealant at J-Boxes 6) An itemized list of all items of equipment to be fitted with flexible electrical connections.
7) Conduit racking details.
g. California Access Compliance Manual and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) compliance.
h. Terminal cabinets: Terminations.

F. Schedule Submittals.

1. An Excel spreadsheet listing jack number, floor number, room number and jack type (workstation, wireless, camera, emergency phone, etc.)

2. Voice cable plant: Cut sheets for use by Sacramento Public Library's Telephone Systems Contractor.

G. Samples

1. Mock-ups of each type of communications outlet faceplate to be furnished for this project. Each faceplate mock-up shall contain the following:
a. Full load of required connectors with eighteen inches (18") of connector type appropriate specified cable terminated on each connector. b. Required faceplate labeling to include faceplate icons as required by these Division 27 Specifications and the accompanying construction drawing set.

H. Cabling and Equipment Test Plan

1. Submit complete documentation of the proposed test plan and equipment to be used to document that the performance of the cabling, equipment, sub-systems and complete systems installed under the work of this project conform with the performance standards outlined in each specification section.

2. Submit not less than 45 days prior to the proposed test date. Include procedures for certification, validation, and testing.

3. Submit manufacturer's or recognized national test laboratory’s calibration certificate one (1) month before any post-installation testing begins. Date on test unit calibration certificate shall be no longer than one (1) year prior to the date that post-installation testing is scheduled to begin.

4. Submit a copy of the Test Equipment manufacturer’s recommended testing procedure for each of the structured cabling system elements listed above in this section.

I. Test Reports

1. Manufacturer's Field Reports
a. Factory reel tests

2. Project Site Test Reports:
a. Submit following system completion and prior to and as condition precedent to Acceptance Review and Testing of the Work of this Section. b. Schedule: Submit test reports in timely manner relative to Project schedule such that the City’s Representativemay conduct verification of submitted test data without delay of scheduled progress. c. Provide test reports as specified within each section of Division 27 requiring performance testing.
d. Content: Include at least:
1) Time and date of test.
2) Personnel conducting test.
3) Test equipment, including serial and date of calibration. 4) Test object.
5) Procedure used.
6) Results of test
7) Numerical or graphical presentation.
e. Submit copy of final results on paper and in electronic form, organized by circuit number, consistent with circuit numbering scheme used in preparing submittal drawings and in labeling receptacles and terminations.
1) Submit machine-generated documentation and raw data of all test results in electronic form on CD-R media
2) Where the electronic documentation requires use of a proprietary computer program to view the data, provide the City’s
Representative with 1 licensed copy of the software.

J. Hazardous Materials Notification: In the event no product or material is available that does not contain asbestos, PCB or other hazardous materials as determined by the City’s Representative, a "Material Safety Data Sheet" (MSDS) equivalent to OSHA Form 20 shall be submitted for that proposed product or material prior to installation.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-13 K. Asbestos and PCB Certification: After completion of installation, but prior to Substantial Completion, Contractor shall certify in writing that products and materials installed, and processes used, do not contain asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB), using format in Article 3 of General Conditions using format in Division 1 Section “Closeout Procedures”.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Procedures: In accordance with Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements.

B. Designated Supervisor: Provide a designated supervisor present and in responsible charge in the fabrication shop and on the Project Site during all phases of installation and testing of the Work of this Section. This supervisor shall be the same individual through the execution of the Work unless illness, loss of personnel, or other circumstances reasonably beyond the control of the Contractor intervene.

C. Reference Documents: At all times when the work is in progress, maintain at the workplace, fabrication shop or Project Site as applies.

1. A complete set of the latest stamped, actioned submittals of record.

2. A complete set of manufacturer's original operation, instruction and service manuals for each equipment item.

D. Standard Products

1. Telecommunications and Audiovisual Equipment. Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 1 year prior to bid opening. The 1-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 1-year period.
a. Alternative Qualifications. Products having less than a 1-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 4000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.

2. Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
a. Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.

E. Test Equipment

1. Requirements:
a. Maintain and operate test equipment at the fabrication shop and the job site for both routine and Acceptance Testing of the Work of this Section. b. Maintain test equipment at the job site while work is in progress from installation of equipment racks until City Representative’sAcceptance of this Work; thereafter remove all of this test equipment from the job site.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-14 c. Unless otherwise indicated, test equipment shall remain property of the Contractor.
d. Provide all required test cables, jigs and adapters. e. Provide equipment with traceable calibration, with calibration date not greater than one year prior to the date of the use of the equipment to perform the specified testing.

F. Qualifications

1. Key Personnel, General
a. Indicate the proposed key persons that are currently employed by the telecommunications contractor or who have a commitment to the low voltage systems and infrastructure contractor for the work of this project.

All key persons shall be employed by the low voltage systems and infrastructure contractor at the date of issuance of this project, or if not, have a commitment to the low voltage systems and infrastructure contractor to work on this project by the date that the bid was due to the City’sRepresentative.
b. Note that only the key personnel approved by the City’s Representative in the successful proposal shall perform work on this project's low voltage systems and infrastructure systems. Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract, as they functioned in the offered successful experience. Any substitutions for the low voltage systems and infrastructure contractor's key personnel requires approval from the City’s Representative.

2. Telecommunications Contractor
a. The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the applications, installation, and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. 1) The telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years.
2) Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for the telecommunications contractor.
b. Key Personnel
1) Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the application, installation and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment. There may be one key person or more key persons proposed for this project depending upon how many of the key roles each has successfully provided. Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful
telecommunications systems within the past 3 years.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-15 2) Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Registered Cabling Installers, Technician Level. Submit documentation of current BICSI certification for each of the key personnel.
3) In lieu of BICSI certification, supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the installation of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components. They shall have factory or factory approved certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are qualified to install and test the provided products. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful
telecommunication system installations for each of the key personnel. Documentation for each key person shall include at least two successful system installations provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity to the telecommunications system proposed for this project. Include specific experience in installing and testing telecommunications systems and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations successfully completed using optical fiber and copper telecommunications cabling systems. All of the existing telecommunications system installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall have been in successful full-time service for at least 18 months prior to the issuance date for this project. Provide the name and role of the key person, the title, location, and completed installation date of the referenced project, the referenced project owner point of contact information including name, organization, title, and telephone number, and generally, the referenced project description including system size and construction complexity

3. Minimum Telecommunications Infrastructure Manufacturer Qualifications a. Cabling, equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacturing, assembly, and factory testing of components which comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, ANSI/TIA-568- C.2 and ANSI/TIA-568-C.3.

4. Audiovisual Qualifications
a. Audiovisual Systems work shall be performed by and the equipment shall be provided by the Audiovisual Systems contractor and key personnel. Qualifications shall be provided for:
1) the Audiovisual Systems contractor,
2) the Audiovisual Systems installer,
3) and the supervisor (if different from the installer). b. A minimum of 30 days prior to installation, submit documentation of the experience of the Audiovisual Systems and of the key personnel. c. AudioVisual Systems Installer
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-16 1) The installer of the audiovisual systems shall be a firm regularly and professionally engaged in the business of installation, configuration and testing of the specified audiovisual systems and equipment.
2) Where the manufacturers of the specified and contractor proposed systems provide mandatory installer and programming training programs, the Contractor's programming and installation staff shall provide documentation to demonstrate their successful completion of the relevant training programs for the types and versions of equipment proposed for installation on this Project. 3) Where the manufacturer of the specified and contractor proposed systems and equipment lawfully restricts sales of their equipment to a network of dealers, the contractor shall provide
documentation to their standing as such a dealer in good standing at the time of bid submittal.
4) The audiovisual systems contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing successful audiovisual systems of a similar scope and nature of those required by the work of this Project within the past 3 years.
5) Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful audiovisual system installations for the audiovisual systems contractor.
d. Key Personnel
1) Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the installing, programming, configuring and testing of the specified audiovisual systems and related presentations and equipment.
2) There may be one key person or more key persons proposed for this project depending upon how many of the key roles each has successfully provided.
3) Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful audiovisual systems of a similar nature scope and extent to those required by the work of this Project within the past 3 years. Alternatively, the key personnel shall hold an Infocomm CTS-I certification in good standing at the time the work of the project commences.

G. Manufacturer’s identification tags or marks are not acceptable on surfaces which will remain exposed to view after installation.

1. Evidence of “patching” after removal of tags or marks is not acceptable.

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulations Applicable: Including but not limited to those defined in Division 1.

1. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed to permit Work not conforming to applicable laws, ordinances, rules, or regulations.

2. Safety Agency Listing: All devices provided under the Work of this Section which are connected to the Project electrical system shall be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory, and shall be so labeled.

3. In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the City’s Representative. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Procedures:

1. In accordance with General Conditions and Division 1 Section “Product Requirements”, as specified in the individual sections of Division 27 and the following.

B. General

1. Protect materials and equipment from damage during delivery, storage, handling and throughout the staging and construction periods. Equipment and materials shall be protected against physical damage, dirt, theft, sun, moisture (including surface water and precipitation) and extreme temperature.

2. The top and bottom ends of all cable shall be available for testing. When not being prepared for testing, both ends of each cable shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of moisture.

3. Provide protection from weather, moisture, extreme heat and cold, dirt, dust, and other contaminants for telecommunications cabling and equipment placed in storage.

4. Do not deliver or install equipment frames and cable trays until spaces are enclosed and weather-tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete.

5. During installation, equipment shall be protected against entry of foreign matter on the inside and be vacuum-cleaned both inside (as appropriate) and outside before testing, operating or painting.

6. As determined by the City’s Representative, damaged equipment shall be fully repaired or shall be removed and replaced with new equipment to fully comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. The decision of the City’s Representative shall be final.

7. Painted surfaces shall be protected with removable heavy kraft paper, sheet vinyl or equal, installed at the factory and removed prior to final inspection.

8. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be repainted with painting equipment and finished with same quality of paint and workmanship as used by manufacturer.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, non-condensing.

1.10 SEQUENCING
A. Not Used.

1.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Commercial off the shelf manuals shall be furnished for operation, installation, configuration, and maintenance of products provided as a part of the communications cabling and systems. Precede the manuals with a system narrative description of function and operation specific to this Project, outlining the major systems functionality, the major systems components, and identifying which manuals document the performance of which subsystems.

1. Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures and 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data and as specified herein not later than 2 weeks prior to the date of beneficial occupancy or as specified in Division 1, whichever is sooner.

1.12 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Comply with Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures, Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents, and the following. Include at least as much information as required for the submittal drawings.

1. Record Drawings
a. CAD.
1) Use a computer aided drafting (CAD) system in the preparation of record drawings for this Project. CAD system shall produce files in AutoCAD® .DWG format, version 2004 or later.
b. Except where prohibited by Contract, City’s Representativewill furnish CAD backgrounds in AutoCAD® .DWG format, for use by the Contractor in preparing Record Drawings.
c. Contractor shall be responsible for updating building and communications plans to reflect as-built conditions.
1) Indicate actual work on Drawings; indicate actual products used, replace vendor neutral nomenclature used in bid set with makes and models of actual installed devices.
d. Disk copy of Record Drawings: Two (2) sets of CDs or DVDs of the as- built drawings.
e. Reproduceables: As required by Division 1
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-19

2. Provide T5 drawings including documentation on cables and termination hardware in accordance with ANSI/TIA-606-B. T5 drawings shall include schedules to show information for cut-overs and cable plant management, patch panel layouts and cover plate assignments, cross-connect information and connecting terminal layout as a minimum. Provide the following T5 drawing documentation as a minimum:
a. Cables - A record of installed cable shall be provided in accordance with ANSI/TIA-606-B. The cable records shall include the required data fields for each cable and complete end-to-end circuit report for each complete circuit from the assigned outlet to the entry facility in accordance with ANSI/TIA-606-B. Include manufacture date of cable with submittal.
b. Termination Hardware - A record of installed patch panels, cross-connect points, distribution frames, terminating block arrangements and type, and outlets shall be provided in accordance with ANSI/TIA-606-B.

Documentation shall include the required data fields as a minimum in accordance with ANSI/TIA-606-B.
c. The list of minimum required Project Record drawings is as follows:
1) All cabling outlets with IDs for each connector on the faceplate; a) Two inch (2”) and larger conduit pathways to include conduit size label;
b) Pull box locations;
c) Two inch (2”) & four inch (4”) J hook runs indicated by a line series of “x”s;
d) Telecom room layout labeled per current construction drawing field mark-ups;
e) Rack elevation labeled per current construction drawing field mark-ups;
f) Backbone copper and fiber schematic drawings with
labeling information

3. Record of Cable Plant Test
a. Two (2) sets of CDs or DVDs of final City’s Representativeaccepted cable plant testing results documentation.
b. Provide at least a copy of software with at least 1 user license if required to view submitted test data.

4. Penetrations
a. All penetrations provided under the work of the project, including fire rated and non fire rated.

5. Fire stopping
a. Two (2) sets of CDs or DVDs of all fire stop graphical UL fire resistance manual reference drawings and supporting text.

6. Spare Parts
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-20 a. In addition to the requirements of Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures, provide a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of spare parts recommended for stocking.

1.13 WARRANTY SERVICE
A. In addition to provisions of General Conditions and Division 1 Section “Product Requirements”, provide the following.

1. Response Time: Provide a qualified technician familiar with the work at the Project Site within 24 hours after receipt of a notice of malfunction. Provide the City’s Representativewith telephone number attended 8 hours a day, 5 days a week, to be called in the event of a malfunction.

B. The Contractor shall provide a one (1) year material and labor warranty on all the work the Contractor has performed.

C. The Contractor shall provide the Structured Cabling System (SCS) manufacturer's materials and link performance certification warranty for all new cable installed by the Contractor in his execution of the work of this specification.

D. Provide all additional Warranties as defined in each Communication Systems Section.

1.14 ACCEPTANCE REVIEW AND TESTING PROCEDURES
A. Complete all Work of this Section. Submit Test Report. Submit review copies of Operating and Maintenance Manuals, less reduced set of Record Drawings. Notify the City’s Representativein writing that the Work of these Sections is complete and fully complies with the Contract Documents. Request Acceptance Review and Testing. The City’s Representativewill conduct Verification of Submitted Test Data, and otherwise direct testing and adjustment of this Work. These procedures may be performed at any hour of the day or night as required by the City’s Representativeto comply with the Project Schedule and avoid conflict with Residents. Provide all specified personnel and equipment at any time without claim for additional cost or time.

B. Personnel: Provide services of the designated supervisor and additional technicians familiar with work of this Section. Provide quantity of technicians as required to comply with Project Schedule.

C. In Addition, Provide:

1. All tools appropriate for performance of adjustment of and corrections to this Work. Include spare wire and connectors and specified tooling for application.

2. Ladders, scaffolding and/or lifts as required to access high devices.

3. All test equipment.

4. Complete set of latest stamped, actioned submittals of record for reference.

5. Complete set of Test Reports.

6. Complete set of manufacturer's original operation, instruction and service manuals for each equipment item for reference.

7. Demonstrate: Complete operation of all systems and equipment, including Portable Equipment.

8. Adjust: As directed by the City’s Representative.

9. Correct: In timely manner, failure to comply with the Contract Documents, as reasonably determined by the City’s Representative.

D. Temporary Equipment: Provide and operate, without claim for additional cost or time, temporary equipment and/or systems to provide reasonably equivalent function, as determined by the City’s Representative, in place of the Work of this Section which is incomplete or found not in conformance with the Contract Documents as of seven (7) days prior to the scheduled completion date. Provide such temporary equipment until Acceptance of the Work of this Section. Thereafter, remove such temporary equipment.

1.15 CLOSEOUT
A. Punch List: Perform any and all remedial work, at no claim for additional cost or time.

Where required, retest and submit Test Report. Notify the City’s Representativeof completion of Punch List.

B. Portable Equipment: Furnish all portable equipment and spares to the City’s Representative, along with complete documentation of the materials presented. Where applicable, furnish portable equipment in the original manufacturer's packing.

C. Operating and Maintenance Data: Install framed operating and maintenance instructions.

Submit Manuals.

D. Project Record Documents: Submit print and digital copies. Digital files shall be in AutoCAD .dwg format.

E. Keys: If applicable, replace construction locks with permanent locks. Provide 5 sets of keys to the City’s Representative.

F. Instruction: Conduct specified instruction.

G. Warranty: Submit Warranty dated to run from date of Acceptance of the Work of this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Where a particular material, device, piece of equipment or system is specified directly, the current manufacturer's specification for the same shall be considered to be a part of these specifications, as if completely contained herein in every detail.

B. Each material, device or piece of equipment shall comply with all of the manufacturer's current published specifications for that item.

C. Products shall be made by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products.

D. Provide quantity as shown on Contract Drawings, or as otherwise indicated.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-22 E. Provide all auxiliary and incidental materials and equipment necessary for the operation and protection of the Work of this Section as if specified in full herein.

F. Unless recycled content is specified, provide new materials.

G. Provide the manufacturer's latest design/model, permanently labeled with the manufacturer's name, model number and serial number.

H. Where products are of similar type or use, provide products of the same manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. When more than one unit of the same type of equipment or material is required, such units shall be the products of a single manufacturer and part number.

I. Components

1. UL or third party certified. Cabling and interconnecting hardware and components for telecommunications systems shall be UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified, and shall comply with NFPA 70 and conform to the requirements specified herein.

2. Where equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations, submit proof of such compliance.
a. The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance.
b. In lieu of the label or listing, submit a certificate from an independent testing organization, competent to perform testing, and approved by the City’s Representative.
c. The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization's test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization's reference standard.

J. Enclosures:

1. Provide steel frames and enclosures designed and wired to eliminate all induced currents.

2. Make bolted connections with self-locking devices.

K. Finishes: Any item or component of the Work of this Section which is visible shall comply with the following.

1. Finishes noted or scheduled on the Contract Drawings take precedence.

2. Where design location requires that products, materials or equipment are visible to the public, no manufacturer's logos larger than 1/2 inch shall be visible. Unless otherwise noted or directed, neatly remove or permanently paint out such logos.

3. Where finishes are not noted or otherwise defined in the Contract Documents, submit manufacturer's standard finish samples for selection by the City’s Representative.

3.1 INTENT OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Contractor shall keep on the Project site a copy of the Specifications and Drawings, and the same shall be available at all reasonable times for inspection and use by the City’s Representative and by any other person authorized by the City's Representative. Any Drawings listed in the detail Specifications shall be regarded as a part thereof and of the Contract. Anything mentioned in these Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in these Specifications, shall be of like effect as though shown or mentioned in both.

B. It shall be the duty of Contractor to see that the provisions of these Specifications are complied with in detail irrespective of the inspection given the work during its progress by the City's Representative. Any failure on the part of Contractor to observe the Specifications will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the work at any time before its acceptance.

C. The drawings use symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate the scope of work. These symbols and diagrams will not typically identify dimensions nor will they identify inclusion of specific accessories, appurtenances and related items necessary and appropriate for a complete and proper installation and operation. The Contractor shall install work complete and ready for proper operation, including related items not specifically identified, shown, indicated or specified. The work shall be installed in accordance with the intent diagrammatically expressed on the drawings and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on architectural drawings and on shop drawings approved by the City’s Representative.

D. The drawings include some details for various items, which are specific with regard to the dimensions and positioning of the work. These details are intended only for the purpose of establishing general feasibility. They do not obviate field coordination for the indicated work. Work shall not proceed until actual field conditions and requirements are verified by the Contractor.

E. The City's Representative will furnish from time to time, such detail drawings, drawings, profiles, and information as the City's Representative may consider necessary for Contractor's guidance to insure the proper and adequate execution of the Contract.

Contractor shall comply with such detail drawings, drawings, profiles and information.

F. In accordance with the requirements of Division 1, only shop drawings and submittals have been received a review of "No Exceptions Taken” or “Make Corrections As Noted” shall be used in construction.

G. Contractor shall not scale the Contract Document set to determine exact dimensions or exact location. Scaled drawings are to be considered diagrammatic. If exact lengths or location placement dimensions are required, the drawings will specifically show those dimensions or placement coordinates.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall furnish all required materials, equipment, and tools necessary to properly complete the work of these specifications including, but not limited to, tools for pulling and terminating the cables, mounting hardware, cable ties, bolts, anchors, clamps, hangers, kits of consumables, lubricants, technician communication devices, cable testing equipment, stands for cable reels, cable wenches, etc.

3.3 EXAMINATION
A. The Contractor is responsible for examining existing conditions and comparing them with drawings and specifications and notifying the City Representative or his/her designate of any discrepancies.

B. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating with the City Representative or his/her designate to address, adjust, and resolve any discrepancies found before commencing work.

C. If a discrepancy between existing conditions and the Contract drawings and specifications are found after commencing work, stop any work that in the Contractor's opinion is affected by the found discrepancy. The contractor shall submit an RFI requesting information on how to resolve the discrepancy. The RFI shall also contain a possible solution, before commencing work in work areas affected by the discrepancy.

3.4 PREPARATION
A. Prepare and sequence the work to minimize disruption to each room environment and existing communications systems.

B. The Contractor shall follow all rules, regulations, and instructions in this specification, general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 specification sections, if issued in conjunction with these Division 27 specifications with regard to the following:

1. Delivery hours.

2. Delivery locations.

3. Storage.

4. Hazardous Material.

5. Security

6. Safety.

7. Logistics.

C. The Contractor shall coordinate their work so there shall be no disruption to any occupants of the occupied portions of the building unless coordinated and approved by the City’s Representative. Any necessary disruption shall be scheduled a minimum of 2 weeks in advance of its occurrence and affected parties shall be notified in writing of date, time, and planned duration of the disruption.

D. Protection:

1. When work is being done in or adjacent to occupied spaces, the Contractor shall protect the occupied spaces from dust, trash and debris through the use of barriers and/or other devices

2. When working in occupied spaces, cover all computers, electronic equipment, desks, chairs, furniture and other articles when working at ceiling level and/or performing dust producing tasks.

3. At no time shall the Contractor use City property including but not limited to the City's furniture, loose equipment or supplies located in occupied spaces in the course of installing the work of this project.

3.5 CLEANING
A. When working in spaces not currently occupied by the City's personnel during ordinary work week:

1. Work areas shall be left broom clean at the end of each work day. This includes the removal of packing material, trash and debris caused by the work.

B. Where working in spaces occupied by the City:

1. Immediately after completing work within each space, clean up and remove all materials, scrap and dust.

2. Surfaces exposed to dust either during the installation or following removal of protection systems as specified herein above shall be cleaned to their original state daily prior to the return of the occupants to the space.

3. All dust resulting from work performed shall be vacuumed up daily prior to the return of the occupants to the space.

C. Disposal

1. All scrap material in work area shall be picked up and removed from the building at the end of each day..

2. See Division 1 for additional requirements and project procedures for waste disposal and recycling requirements that apply to this project.

3.6 REPAIR AND RESTORATION
A. Where working in spaces occupied by the City, return to their original positions any furniture or articles relocated to perform the work.

3.7 VERIFICATION
A. The Contractor shall verify that the installation and materials used have been inspected before they are enclosed within building features, or otherwise hidden from view. The Contractor shall bear costs associated with uncovering or exposing installations or features that have not been inspected and approved.

B. The Contractor shall verify that requirements of this specification are met. Verification shall be through a combination of analyses, inspections, demonstrations and tests, as described below.

1. Verification by Inspection. Verification by inspection includes the examination of items and comparison of pertinent characteristics against the qualitative or quantitative standard set forth in the specifications. Inspection may require moving or partially disassembling the item to accomplish the verification, included as part of the work at no additional cost to the City.

C. Verification by Test and Demonstration. The Contractor shall verify by formal demonstrations or tests that the requirements of this specification have been met. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the communications systems components and subsystems meet specification requirements in the "as-installed" operating environment during the System Operation Test. Even though no formal environmental testing is required, the Contractor shall measure and record temperature, humidity and other environmental parameters and the environmental conditions, which were encountered during the System Operation Test.

3.8 COMMISSIONING AND ACCEPTANCE
A. General:

1. Upon completion of the work, remove excess debris, materials, equipment, apparatus, tools and similar items. Leave the premises clean, neat and orderly.

B. Results Expected:

1. Communications Infrastructure Systems shall be complete and ready for use.

2. Testing, start-up and cleaning work shall be complete.

3. Maintenance Materials: Special tools for proper operation and maintenance of the equipment provided under this Specification shall be delivered to the City.

C. Inspections

1. There shall be three phases of commissioning inspections:
a. Rough-in inspection
b. Above-ceiling inspection (after cables are placed)
c. Final inspection and testing

2. The Contractor shall verify that the installation and materials used have been inspected before they are enclosed within building features, or otherwise hidden from view. The Contractor shall bear costs associated with uncovering or exposing installations or features that have not been inspected and approved.

D. Rough-in inspection. Once electrical rough-in and pathways have been installed, but prior to walls and ceilings being installed, the Contractor shall request the design team, in writing, for the official rough-in inspection to take place. The City’s Representative will then schedule a time to be on-site to conduct this inspection.

1. At a minimum, the City’s Representative willevaluate the following items:
a. Accurate location and height above finished floor for all outlet boxes. b. Accurate dimensions (particularly depth) of all outlet boxes and diameter of in-wall conduit serving outlet boxes.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 0500-27 c. Cable tray size, location, and clearance.
d. Location and size of all other communications conduits or pathways. e. Location, spacing and clearance of and around racks and wall-mounted equipment.
f. That communications room power receptacles, where installed under the work of this project, meet the design requirements.

2. The City’s Representative is then to issue a written report to theContractor identifying all items which currently do not meet the construction document requirements. All items are to be resolved prior to walls and ceilings being closed up. This report is not necessarily all-inclusive; should issues be discovered later in the project, the Contractor is still responsible for corrections/repairs.

E. Above-ceiling inspection

1. Once all communication cabling has been installed and properly supported and walls have been painted, but prior to the installation of ceiling tiles/material, contractor shall request of the design team, in writing, for the official above- ceiling inspection. The City’s Representative will then schedule a time to be on- site to conduct this inspection

2. At a minimum, the City’s Representative willevaluate the following items:
a. That all items from the previous inspection have been corrected. b. That communications cabling is routed correctly and adequately supported.
c. That communications cabling is not painted or over-sprayed. d. That the installed communications cabling matches what was specified/submitted.
e. That there are no kinks, splices, or other damage to the installed communications cabling.
f. That all cables and WAOs are properly labeled.
g. That all penetrations through fire-rated walls are properly firestopped, including fire blocking materials installed in the annular spaces; and that the firestops are properly labeled.

3. The City’s Representativewill then issue a written report to the Contractor identifying all items which currently do not meet the construction document requirements. This report is not necessarily all- inclusive; should issues be discovered later in the project, the appropriate communications subcontractor is still responsible for corrections/repairs.

F. Final Inspection.

1. Once all communications work has been completed, contractor shall request of the City’s Representative, in writing, the official final inspection. This request shall be made 3 weeks before substantial completion. The City’s Representative will then schedule a time to be on-site to conduct this inspection.

2. At a minimum, the City’s Representative will check the following items:
a. That all items from the previous inspections have been corrected. b. That all faceplates are installed, with the correct modules, quantity of modules, and approved labeling scheme.
c. That all equipment and cabling within communications rooms is installed per the contract documents, including all patch panels and wall blocks (with specified spare capacity), horizontal and backbone cabling labeling, and telecommunications grounding.
d. And all other items necessary to guarantee contract documents are met and complete and functioning communications systems are installed. e. That all cables and WAOs are properly labeled.
f. That all penetrations through fire-rated walls are properly firestopped, including fire blocking materials installed in the annular spaces; and that the firestops are properly labeled.

3. The Contractor shall provide the following for the acceptance testing. a. All personnel required for perform the tests. This shall include the site supervisor.
b. All tools appropriate for performance of adjustment of and corrections to this Work. Include spare wire and connectors and specified tooling for application.
c. Ladders, scaffolding and/or lifts as required to access high devices. d. All test equipment.
e. Complete set of latest stamped, actioned submittals of record for reference.
f. Complete set of Test Reports.
g. Complete set of manufacturer's original operation, instruction and service manuals for each equipment item for reference.

4. The Contractor shall execute the test plan required in the above Submittals section and as approved and/or modified by the City’s Representative. The testing must demonstrate complete operation of all systems and equipment, including any portable equipment.

5. These procedures may be performed at any hour of the day or night as required by the City’s Representative to comply with the Project Schedule and avoid conflict with Residents. Provide all specified personnel and equipment at any time without claim for additional cost or time.

6. After installation, the Contractor shall test, certify and provide required warranties for the Structured Cabling System (SCS) installed per the requirements of this specification.

3.9 ADJUSTMENTS
A. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating and documenting with the City Representative or his/her designate the change order process and fully comply with requirements of Division 1.

3.10 ACCEPTANCE
A. The project specified by this specification shall be considered completed and signed off as completed by the City Representative or his/her designate contingent upon the following:

1. All punch lists have been completed and signed as complete by the City’s Representative.

2. Abandoned cabling has been removed.

3. Cleaning is complete.

4. Required cable plant testing has been executed and required test result documentation has been submitted and approved by the City Representative or his/her designate - refer to Section 27 10 00 - Structured Cabling, Basic Materials & Methods

5. Any required adjustments to as-built drawings have been completed, submitted, and approved as complete by the City Representative or his/her designate.

6. Required warranty documentation has been submitted and approved as complete by the City Representative or his/her designate.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 GROUNDING BONDING SECTION 27 0526-1

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Related Work Under Other Sections

1. Related Sections:
a. Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications b. Section 27 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems c. Section 27 05 33 – Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems
d. Section 27 11 16 – Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes grounding and bonding of Communications Work, including but not limited to:

1. Communications Raceways

2. Cable Runway

3. Cable Shields

4. Protector Fields

5. Communications cabinets and enclosures.

6. Outside Plant Grounding and Bonding

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide telecommunications system grounding conductor as described herein and indicate on drawings.

B. Except as otherwise indicated, the complete communications installation including the metallic conduits and raceways, cable trays, boxes, cabinets, racks, panels, cable shields and lightning protectors shall be completely and effectively grounded in accordance with all code requirements, whether or not such connections are specifically shown or specified.

C. Resistance:

1. Resistance from the farthest ground bus through the ground electrode to earth shall not exceed 5 Ohms or the requirements of ANSI-J-STD-607-D, whichever is more restrictive.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 GROUNDING BONDING SECTION 27 0526-2

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

2. Resistance from Communications racks buss ground to Ufer ground must remain less than or equal to the electrical ground presented at A/C outlet for electronic equipment in the communications rack

1.4 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI-J-STD-607-D Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A-2002 Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure
B. IEEE

1. IEEE C135.30 (1988) Standard for Zinc-Coated Ferrous Ground Rods for Overhead or Underground Line Construction
C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1. UL 467 (1993); R 2004 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.7 DELIVERY HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the manufacturers specified in this section establish the minimum functional, aesthetic and quality standards required for work of this section B. Equal products by the following manufacturers will be considered providing that all features of the specified product are provided:

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

1. Ground Rod:
a. High strength high carbon steel, with electrolytically bonded jacket of copper on surface
b. 5/8" diameter minimum.
c. 5' long minimum.
d. UL spec. 467
e. ANSI C-33.8-1072.
f. Manufacturer:
1) Allied Bolt
2) Inwesco 12A60
3) Blackburn
4) Cooper Power Systems
5) Weaver.
6) Erico "Cadweld" Products, Inc.
7) ITT Blackburn.
8) Or equal.

2. Ground Wells:
a. Christy Concrete Products, Inc.
b. Forni Corp.
c. Or equal.

3. Ground Bushings, Connectors, Jumpers and Bus:
a. O-Z/Gedney.
b. Thomas & Betts Corp.
c. Or equal.

4. Compression Connector Lug
a. Panduit
b. B-Line SB-479 Series
c. Thomas & Betts
d. Or equal.

5. Telecommunications Ground Bus Bar
a. CPI Telecommunications Grounding BusBars
b. B-Line
c. Panduit
d. or equal.

6. Rack and Cabinet Grounding
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 GROUNDING BONDING SECTION 27 0526-4

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
a. Panduit Structured Ground Kit
b. Chatsworth Products Inc.
c. or equal.

7. Bonding Ribbon:
a. Annealed solid copper 3/8 inch wide x 1/16 inch thick, tin plated. b. Manufacturer:
1) Inwesco 12A55
2) Corning Cable Systems
3) Preformed Line Products.
4) or equal.

8. Bonding Ribbon Clamp:
a. Soft lead
b. 1/16 inch thick
c. Bolt hole for attachment
d. Manufacturer:
1) Inwesco 12A56
2) Corning Cable Systems
3) Preformed Line Products.
4) Or equal.

9. Fargo Clamp:
a. Cast copper, silver plated, furnished with copper bolt. b. RUS Listed
c. Manufacturer:
1) Allied Bolt
2) Inwesco 12A57
3) Corning Cable Systems
4) or equal.

10. Ground Inserts:
a. Cast Bronze with 1/4 copper Rod.
b. Provide minimum one each vault.
c. Provide minimum two each maintenance hole.
d. Manufacturer:
1) Inwesco 12H69
2) or equal by vault or manhole manufacturer.

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
3) or equal.

2.2 GROUND CONDUCTORS
A. General purpose insulated:

1. NRTL listed and code sized copper conductor, with dual rated THHN/THWN insulation, color solid green. The jacket may have a yellow stripe.

2. The jacket shall include markings that indicate conductor, manufacturer, and NRTL listing.

3. Minimum wire size is #6 AWG UON. Grounding conductors larger than 4 AWG (5 mm) shall be stranded. Use solid conductors for 4 AWG (5 mm) and smaller.

4. Use stranded grounding conductors at locations subject to vibration or repeated flexing, regardless of size.

5. Where continuous color-coded conductors are not commercially available, provide a minimum 4 in. long color band with green, non-aging, plastic tape in accordance with NEC. The band shall be located within 152 mm (6 in.) of each termination and splice and at 1.2 m (4 ft.) intervals along its run.

6. Plenum rated, if run in plenum spaces.

B. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)

1. A TBB shall be provided between the TMGB and each TGB.

2. The TBB shall be sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up to a maximum size of 168 kcmil (No. 3/0 AWG; 12 mm).

C. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT)

1. A BCT shall be provided between each TMGB and the building's service equipment (power) ground.

2. The BCT shall be the same size as, or larger than, the largest TBB.

D. Rack Bonding Conductor (RBC)

1. A separate RBC shall be provided between each cabinet or rack and the TGB or TMGB in the room.

2. Each RBC shall be sized as a 6 AWG (4 mm).

E. Unit Bonding Conductor (UBC)

1. Separate UBCs shall be provided for each piece of active equipment in a rack/cabinet that has a ground connection point separate from its power source.

2. The UBCs shall be connected between the active equipment and the RGB of the cabinet/rack.

3. The UBC shall be a minimum 12 AWG (2 mm).

F. Bonding Jumpers
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 GROUNDING BONDING SECTION 27 0526-6

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

1. Bonding jumpers shall be used wherever two metallic parts meet in an electrically insecure connection. Examples include, without limitation, cable tray sections and cabinet or rack components and doors.

2. Bonding jumpers shall be factory pre-terminated.

G. Outside Plant Applications

1. Grounding conductors shall be bare copper, meeting ASTM B 8 soft-drawn unless otherwise indicated. Aluminum is not acceptable.

H. Bonding pigtails: Insulated copper conductor, identified green, sized per code, and provided with termination screw or lug. Provide solid conductors for #10 AWG or smaller and stranded conductors for #8 AWG or larger.

2.3 COMPRESSION CONNECTOR LUG
A. Description

1. Connector lug with compression connection to conductor.

2. Copper alloy body.

3. Provide lug size to match conductor being terminated.

4. Provide 2 hole pattern lugs.

5. Provide each lug with silicon bronze hardware, including 2 bolts, 2 split lock washers and 2 nuts.

2.4 INSULATED GROUNDING BUSHINGS
A. Plated malleable iron or steel body with 150 degree Centigrade molded plastic insulating throat and lay-in grounding lug.

2.5 CONNECTIONS TO PIPE
A. For cable to pipe: UL listed bolted connection complying with NEC requirements.

2.6 CONNECTIONS TO STRUCTURAL STEEL, GROUND RODS, OR SPLICES A. Where required by the Drawings or Specifications, grounding conductors shall be spliced together, connected to ground rods or connected to structural steel using exothermic welds or high pressure compression type connectors.

1. Exothermic welds shall be used for cable-to-cable and cable-to-ground rod and for cable to structural steel surfaces. Exothermic weld kits shall be as manufactured by Cadweld, Thermoweld or equal. Each particular type of weld shall use a kit unique to that type of weld.

2. High-pressure compression type connectors shall be used for cable-to-cable and cable-to-ground rod connections. Connections shall be as manufactured by Thomas & Betts #53000 series, Burndy “Hy-Ground” or equal.

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

2.7 EXTRA FLEXIBLE, FLAT BONDING JUMPERS
A. Where required by the drawing or specified herein.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide Grounding and Bonding according to the most restrictive requirements of:

1. ANSI-J-STD-607-B-2011.

2. California Electrical Code Article 250 and references therein.

3. California Electrical Code Article 800.

B. In the event of conflicting requirements, California Electrical Code requirements shall prevail.

3.2 BONDED COMPONENTS:

A. Bonding conductors or jumpers are to be installed within each Telecommunications Space between the TMGB/TGB and the following components:

1. The communications building entrance protectors.

2. Metallic shielding of outside cable plant.

3. Metallic shielding of inside cables, where required by Code.

4. Electrical panel board (if in the same room as TMGB/TGB).

5. Building steel (if accessible in the same room as TMGB/TGB or close by external to the room).

6. Telecommunications ladder rack and cable tray.

7. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets via the RGBs.

8. Wall-mounted metallic enclosures.

9. Metallic conduit longer that 1 m (3 ft.) and not secured to a grounded enclosure in an electrically continuous manner.

10. Access floor systems.

B. Where a metallic raceway connects two or more Telecommunications Spaces, bond to the Telecommunications Ground Busbar at each end
C. Point of Connection

1. Under Work of this Section, make connections to Communications Ground Busbars provided under Work of Division 26, or by separate project, as applies.

D. Grounding Busbars
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 GROUNDING BONDING SECTION 27 0526-8

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

1. Install busbars per manufacturer’s instructions and at locations shown on the plans. If locations are unclear, apply for and conform to direction from the City’s Representative.

2. Locate all busbars so that they are accessible to telecommunications personnel, yet not exposed to casual contact. Other cable types must not be allowed to contact the busbars or pass within 152 mm (6 in.) of the busbar. a. TMGBs and TGBs shall be located on or near the wall opposite the entrance, at least 2.1 m (7 ft.) above finished floor (AFF). b. RGBs shall be located on the rear of the cabinet/rack. Horizontal RGBs shall be as near the top of the rails as space allows. Vertical RGBs shall be used only in closed cabinets.

E. TMGB

1. The TMGB shall be bonded directly to the closest point of the building’s earth grounding electrode system and to building steel. Building steel should be tested to verify its ground conductivity to earth.

2. All metallic raceways for telecommunications cabling located within the same room or space as the TMGB shall be bonded to the TMGB.

3. Insulate the TMGB 51 mm (2”) from the wall.

4. For outside plant cables entering a building with a cable shield isolation gap, bond the cable shield (on the building side of the gap) to the TMGB. Outside plant protectors shall be bonded to the TMGB with a No. 4 AWG (5 mm) conductor.

5. Connections to the busbar shall be made with 2-hole lugs.

6. Connections shall be made by cleaning the area of connection on the busbar and on the two-hole lug and then applying a thin coating of anti-oxidant compound.

F. TGB

1. The TGB shall be bonded directly to the TMGB and to building steel. Building steel should be tested to verify its ground conductivity to earth.

2. All metallic racks, cabinets, enclosures and raceways for telecommunications cabling located within the same room or space as the TGB shall be bonded to the TGB.

3. Insulate the TGB 51 mm (2”) from the wall.

4. Connections to the busbar shall be made with 2-hole lugs.

5. Connections shall be made by cleaning the area of connection on the busbar and on the two-hole lug and then applying a thin coating of anti-oxidant compound.

G. RGB

1. An RGB shall be installed on/in all racks and cabinets.

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
a. The paint or other coating of the cabinet/rack shall be removed and the bare metal cleaned around each point where the RGB contacts the cabinet/rack.
b. A thin coating of anti-oxidant compound shall then be applied to the contact points before the RGB is bolted down.
c. The mounting screws should be of the thread-forming type, not self- tapping or sheet metal screws, if possible.

2. Each RGB shall be bonded to the TGB or TMGB in the same room with a dedicated RBC.
1) Each piece of active equipment in a rack/cabinet that has a ground connection point separate from its power source shall be bonded to the RGB.

H. Routing

1. Bonding conductors shall be routed in as direct a route as possible to the point of termination while adhering to the following: No bonding conductor shall vertically traverse a wall except at wall corners.

2. Must not be daisy-chained among equipment, racks or pathways.

3. Shall have no twists, loops or sharp bends. Conductors shall be routed with smooth wide bends.

4. Should not be spliced. When necessary, use an approved Listed connection and position it in an accessible location.

5. Must be protected from physical damage, by its location or with a non-metallic barrier.

6. Should not be placed in metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding and bonding conductors in metallic conduit that exceeds 1 m (3 ft) in length, the conduit must be grounded at both ends to the same ground point as the conductor.

7. Jacketed conductors run in plenum spaces must be plenum rated.

8. The maximum current on any grounding conductor under normal operation should be less than 1A AC and 500mA DC.

9. Shall be sized per code, depending on the length.

I. Mechanical Connections

1. Except where a manufacturer provided grounding lug is provided, the paint or other coating of the component (rack, cabinet, cable tray, etc.) shall be removed and the bare metal cleaned around each point where a conductor lug is connected.

2. A thin coating of anti-oxidant compound shall then be applied to the contact points before the lug is bolted down.

3. Mounting screws should be of the thread-forming type, not self-tapping or sheet metal screws.

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

4. Cable trays and conduit shall not be used as a grounding conductor, even if they are so rated.

5. Clean ground bars prior to terminating bonding conductors.

6. Torque threaded fasteners to manufacturer’s recommended values.

J. Bonding Jumpers

1. Install manufacturer’s bonding clips, plates or bonding jumpers:

2. Across the joint where sections of cable tray (mesh or ladder) meet.

3. Between a cabinet’s door and its frame.

4. Between all other separate panels of a cabinet and the frame; such as the top, bottom & side panels and air ducting baffles.

5. Across all frame joints of cabinets and racks, unless the cabinet/rack is factory welded and fully assembled on arrival.

K. Cabinet and Rack Continuity

1. As an alternative to using jumpers across all separate parts and frame joints of a cabinet/rack, one of the following options may be used.

2. Remove the paint or other coating of both parts being joined to create a bare metal area at least the same diameter as the bolt head. Clean both bare metal areas and apply a thin coating of anti-oxidant compound before connecting the parts.

3. Use aggressive Type “B” internal-external tooth lock washers. Torque the bolts per manufacturer’s instructions to create an acceptable bond. Two washers are necessary to accomplish this: one under the bolt head contacting and cutting paint and one under the nut.

L. Grounding Lugs

1. Wires shall be inserted to the full depth of the lug.

2. Space between wire insulation and the body of the compression lug shall be kept to a maximum of 3 mm (1/8 in.)

3. Lug must be sized with wire size.

4. To assure proper die is used with the specified connector, manufacturer's embossed coding systems shall be adhered to.

5. Connectors shall not be modified in any way.

6. Daisy chaining and stacking (piggy backing) of ground lugs is prohibited.

7. Bolts, nuts and washers used to secure ground connections shall match the diameter of the hole.

8. Make compression connections with the lug or fitting manufacturer’s recommended tooling, with the tooling set to the recommended force and stroke.

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
M. Cable Tray and Cable Runway

1. Coordinate with the Work of Section 27 05 36 – Cable Trays for Communications Systems

2. Provide manufacturer’s bonding clips, plates or jumpers as required to comply with the UL Classified conditions for use as an equipment grounding conductor.

3. Bond the Cable Runway to the Communications Ground Busbar at the Communications Room served.

N. Cable Shields

1. Comply with California Electrical Code Article 800.

O. Protector Fields

1. Comply with California Electrical Code Article 800.

P. Emergency/Information Telephone enclosures

1. Bond as detailed on Communications Drawings.

Q. Communications Broadband Systems

1. Comply with California Electrical Code Article 820.

2. Ground Broadband passives as shown on Communications Drawings.

3.3 LABELING
A. All labels shall be permanent, computer-generated and nonmetallic, printed with wording in high contrast to the background. Comply with Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems.

B. Each telecommunications bonding conductor shall be labeled as close as practicable to its point of termination in a readable position. Labels shall have:

1. The statement, “If this connector or cable is loose or must be removed, please call the building telecommunications manager”.

2. An identification label providing the source and destination of the grounding conductor.

3. Conductors contained completely within one room need not have the source and destination label.

4. Instead, label the busbar at each connection with the name of bonded equipment (rack, tray, etc.) connected at that point.

C. The BCT, or the conduit containing it, shall be labeled:

1. At the TMGB with tag or adhesive label that states “Building Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT) to Main Electrical Service Ground Connection”.

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

2. At the main electrical service ground connection with tag or adhesive label that states “Building Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT) to Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB)”.

3.4 TESTING
A. All grounding connections shall be tested for continuity and resistance after installation but prior to substantial completion. The telecommunications contractor is to invite the City’s Representative to witness a portion of this testing while it is being performed.

B. The test performed shall use an earth ground resistance tester that is configured for a continuity test, otherwise known as a two-point test or a “dead earth” test. Tests shall be conducted between the electrical entrance ground and the TMGB as well as at each TGB.

This resistance shall be less than 0.05 Ohms.

3.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING OUTSIDE CABLE PLANT (OSP)
A. Underground Communications Structure Ground Rods

1. Ground rods shall be installed at new communications handholes, vaults and pullboxes installed by the work of this Project. A ground rod shall be installed at new communications handholes, vaults, manholes and pullboxes installed by the work of this Project, or at existing underground structures used by the work of this Project lacking a ground rod.
a. Provide two ground rods at maintenance holes.
b. Elsewhere provide one ground rod.

2. Ground rods shall be driven into the earth before the manhole floor is poured so that approximately 4 inches of the ground rod will extend above the manhole floor. When precast concrete manholes are used, the top of the ground rod may be below the manhole floor and a No. 1/0 AWG ground conductor brought into the manhole through a watertight sleeve in the manhole wall.

3. Ground rods installed in manholes, handholes, or concrete pullboxes shall be connected to cable racks, cable-pulling irons, the cable shielding, metallic sheath, and armor at each cable joint or splice by means of a No. 4 AWG braided tinned copper wire. Connections to metallic cable sheaths shall be by means of tinned terminals soldered to ground wires and to cable sheaths. a. Care shall be taken in soldering not to damage metallic cable sheaths or shields. Ground rods shall be protected with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive plastic tape for a distance of 2 inches above and 6 inches below concrete penetrations.
b. Grounding electrode conductors shall be neatly and firmly attached to manhole or handhole walls and the amount of exposed bare wire shall be held to a minimum.

B. Underground Cable Bonding
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 GROUNDING BONDING SECTION 27 0526-13

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

1. Cables used in underground conduit systems have either an outer metallic sheath or a plastic sheath. Cables with an outer metallic sheath shall be bonded at each Maintenance Hole (MH). Cables with an outer plastic sheath shall be bonded at MHs where a splice is made. When using OSP cable for a LAN drop, splices should not be made.

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 27 0529-1

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Related work: Consult all other Sections, determine the extent and character of related work and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete installation.

1. Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications

2. Section 27 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

3. Section 27 05 33 – Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems

4. Section 27 05 36 – Cable Trays for Communications Systems

5. Section 27 05 39 – Surface Raceways for Communications Systems

6. Section 27 05 43 – Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems

7. Section 27 05 48 – Noise and Vibration Controls for Communications Systems

8. Section 27 05 53 – Identification for Communications Systems

9. Section 27 10 00 – Structured Cabling, Basic Materials and Methods

10. Section 27 11 16 – Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures

11. Section 27 11 23 – Communications Cable Management

12. Section 27 13 00 – Communications Interior Backbone Cabling

13. Section 27 14 00 – Communications Outside Plant Backbone Cabling

14. Section 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment, and services to completely execute the provision of communications supports and cable hook system as described in this specification, including but not limited to:

1. Strut supports

2. Cable Hooks (J-hooks)

3. Beam clamps

4. Concrete Fasteners

5. Touch-Up Materials
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 27 0529-2

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

6. Conduit supports.

7. Equipment supports.

8. Fastening hardware.

B. Provide devices specified in this Section and related Sections for support of communications infrastructure and equipment specified for this Project.

C. Provide support systems that are adequate for the weight of equipment, conduit and wiring to be supported.

D. Seismic Design Requirements

1. Identify each item requiring seismic restraint installation in accordance with CBC Chapter 16. Include floor mounted items weighing more than 400 pounds and wall mounted or suspended items weighing more than 20 pounds.

2. Supports for such items, including racks, conduit, cable trays and similar shall be provided support, bracing, and anchorage, designed by the Contractor in accordance with the following criteria:
a. Design to resist seismic forces in accordance with CBC Chapter 16. b. Minimum Design Parameters - As defined for the Building, with respect to Occupancy Category, Site Classification, Seismic Design Category, Importance Factor, Spectral Acceleration and SDI.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide devices specified in this Section and related Sections for support of communications equipment specified for this Project.

B. Provide support systems that are adequate for the weight of equipment, conduit and wiring to be supported.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM A123/A123M-02 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

2. ASTM A153/A153M-04 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

3. ASTM B633-98e1 Specification for Electro-deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.

4. ASTM A653/A653M-04a Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises, 2009
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 27 0529-3

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, 2009

3. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard, published 2009

4. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, published 2008, plus errata issued in October, 2008.

5. ANSI/ TIA 569-C (2012) Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces C. National Fire Protection Association

1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures, Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications and the following:

1. As part of the project submittals, the contractor to provide engineered shop drawings indicating the proposed design for mounting all work of this Division weighing more than 20 pounds, inclusive of mounting systems, and for equipment mounted at the exterior, inclusive of its effective wind load under conditions the range of conditions experience
a. Shop drawings to be accompanied by anchorage calculations indicating that it shall remain attached to the mounting surface after experiencing forces in conformance with California Code of Regulations, Title 24, 2010 California Building Code.
b. Structural Calculations shall be prepared and signed by a California Registered Structural Engineer. Specify proof loads for drilled-in anchors, if used.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification, Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications and the following:

B. All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new and unused, and of current manufacturer.

C. Cable hooks shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as required.

D. Cable hooks shall have the manufacturers name and part number stamped in the part itself for identification.

E. DELIVERY HANDLING AND STORAGE

1. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 27 0529-4

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the manufacturers specified in this section establish the minimum functional, aesthetic and quality standards required for work of this section.

2.2 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. General

1. Supports to be sized to suit load and selected to match mounting conditions B. Manufacturers

1. Equal products by the following manufacturers will be considered providing that all features of the specified product are provided:
a. Concrete fasteners:
1) Phillips "Red-Head".
2) Remington.
3) Ramset.
4) Hilti
5) Simpson Strong-Tie
6) or equal.
b. Concrete inserts and construction channel:
1) Unistrut Corp.
2) GS Metals "Globe Strut."
3) Thomas & Betts "Kindorf" Corp.
4) Or equal.
c. Conduit straps:
1) O-Z/Gedney.
2) Erico "Caddy" Fastening Products.
3) Thomas & Betts "Kindorf" Corp.
4) Or equal.
d. Beam Clamps
1) Cooper B-Line
2) SuperStrut
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS SECTION 27 0529-5

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
3) Unistrut
4) or equal
e. Aircraft Cable Sway Braces
1) Mason Industries
2) M.W. Sausse/Vibrex
3) Loos & Company, Inc.
4) or equal.

C. Concrete Fasteners

1. Furnish post-installed concrete anchors as required. Each post-installed anchor shall have an ICC-ES evaluation report stating that the product is compliant with the current edition of the CBC and the intended conditions of use.

2. Provide expansion-shield type concrete anchors.

3. Provide powder driven concrete fasteners with washers. Obtain approval from City’s Representative prior to use.

D. Concrete Inserts

1. Provide pressed galvanized steel, concrete spot insert, with oval slot capable of accepting square or rectangular support nuts of ¼ inch to ½ inch diameter thread for rod support.

E. Aircraft cable sway braces

1. Steel rope sized to meet load.

F. Construction Channel:

1. Construction:
a. 1-5/8" square galvanized channel formed from U.S.S.G No. 12 or 0.109 inch cold formed steel with 17/32-inch diameter bolt holes, and 1-1/2 inch on center in the base of the channel.
b. 10 foot sections.

2. All supporting materials by same manufacturer.

G. Beam Clamps

1. Malleable iron electro-galvanized steel beam clamps selected to match building structural steel members.

H. Conduit Straps

1. One hole strap, steel or malleable iron, with malleable iron clamp-back spacer for surface mounted wall and ceiling applications.
a. Use malleable strap with spacers for exterior and wet locations. b. Use steel strap without spacers for interior locations.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

2. Steel channel conduit strap for support from construction channel.

3. Steel conduit hanger for pendant support with threaded rod

4. Steel wire conduit support strap for support from independent #12 gauge hanger wires.

I. Threaded rods, couplings, screws and nuts:

1. Electrolytically coated with zinc, 2 oz. zinc per square foot of surface, ASTM A123 or A153.

J. Miscellaneous Parts

1. Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication; after cutting, de-burring and hole drilling. Coated with zinc, 2 oz. zinc per square foot of surface, ASTM A123 or A153.

K. Paint/Tape for Touch-up:

1. Zinc: CRC "Zinc-It", Glyptal, Enterprise Galvanizing “Galambra”, or equal.

2.3 CABLE HANGERS
A. Ceiling Hung J-Hooks

1. Drawing Reference(s):
a. WMJ
b. ACJ

2. Features/Functions/Construction
a. Specifically intended to carry the load of up to 50 communications cables without applying excess forces to cables at bottom of bundle. b. Integral broad bottom edge to spread cable load with flat bottom and provide a minimum of 1-5/8 inch cable bearing surface.
c. Integral hanger rod attachment hardware at top.
d. Load rated for application.
e. Incorporates smooth 90-degree radiused edges to prevent snagging cable jackets on installation.
f. Designed so the mounting hardware is recessed to prevent cable damage. g. Integral mechanical cable latch retainer to provide containment of cables within the hook. The retainer shall be removable and reusable. h. Suitable for direct attachment to walls, hanger rods, beam flanges, purlins, strut, floor posts, etc. to meet job conditions. i. Multi-tiered cable hooks to be used where required to provide separate cabling compartments, or where additional capacity is needed. j. Finishes:

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
1) Cable hooks for non-corrosive areas shall be pre-galvanized steel, ASTM A653. Where additional strength is required, cable hooks shall be spring steel with a zinc-plated finish, ASTM B633, SC3.
2) Cable hooks for corrosive areas shall be stainless steel, AISI Type 304.

3. Manufacturer
a. Cooper B-Line series BCH21, BCH32, BCH64
b. Caddy/Erico CableCat
c. or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. The City’s Representative reserves the right to request additional supports where in their sole opinion said supports are required. Any additional supports shall be installed at no additional cost to the City.

3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Thoroughly examine site conditions for acceptance of supporting device installation to verify conformance with manufacturer and specification tolerances. Do not commence with installation until all conditions are made satisfactory.

3.3 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads required for equipment installation with Division 3, Cast-in-place Concrete Specification.

B. Layout support devices to maintain headroom, neat mechanical appearance and to support the equipment loads.

C. Where shown on the Drawings or Specifications, install freestanding communications equipment on concrete pads.

3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install supporting devices as noted throughout Division 27.

B. Communications device and conduit supports shall be independent of all other system supports that are not structural elements of the building, unless otherwise noted.

C. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, outlet and junction boxes to building structure using precast inserts, expansion anchors, preset inserts or beam clamps.

D. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster or gypsum board partitions and walls.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
E. Use expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls.

F. Use self-drilling anchors, expansion anchor, or preset inserts on concrete surfaces.

G. Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction.

H. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, conduit, or acoustical ceiling suspension wires.

I. Do not drill structural steel members unless first approved in writing by the City’s Representative.

J. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.

K. Install surface-mounted cabinets with minimum of four anchors. Provide additional support backing in stud walls prior to sheet rocking as required to adequately support cabinets and panels.

L. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls.

3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."

3.6 WOOD SUPPORTS
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

3.7 ANCHORAGE
A. Identify each item requiring seismic restraint installation in accordance with CBC Chapter 16A.

1. Include floor mounted items weighing more than 400 pounds and wall mounted or suspended items weighing more than 20 pounds.

2. Machinery, equipment, and their components including their support, bracing, and anchorage, designed by manufacturers or suppliers, shall be designed in accordance with the following criteria:
a. Design to resist seismic forces in accordance with the most restrictive requirements of CBC Chapter 16A, including but not limited to Paragraph 1615.10.14.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
b. As part of the equipment submittals, the contractor shall provide anchorage calculations for floor and wall mounted communications equipment so that it shall remain attached to the mounting surface after experiencing forces in conformance with requirements of Chapter 16A of the CBC
c. Structural Calculations shall be prepared and signed by a California Registered Structural Engineer. Specify proof loads for drilled-in anchors, if used.

B. The contractor shall recommend the method of anchoring the equipment to the mounting surface and shall provide the Contractor with the assembly dimensions, weights and approximate centers of gravity.

C. All floor mounted, free standing electrical equipment such as racks and cabinets, etc. shall be securely fastened to the floor structure.

3.8 DISTRIBUTION PATHWAY VIA CEILING HUNG CABLE HOOKS (J-HOOKS) A. Void, Plenum or Suspended Ceiling Exposed Cable Installation. Where drawings specifically show or permit use of exposed cable installation in voids, conform to the most restrictive requirements of Code, TIA-569-C and this Section.

B. Provide support for all cabling. Do not place or attach directly to T-bar grid, concealed spline grid, flexible or rigid ductwork, HVAC registers, sprinkler piping or fixtures, light fixtures or building structure. Conform to the California Electric Code.

C. Placement:

1. All pathways created by ceiling hung cable hooks shall be reviewed by the City’s Representative prior to installation.

2. Ceiling hung cable hooks and cabling supported by same shall not obscure access to access doors, hatches, air dampers, valves, filter sections, VAV boxes, cable trays, junction boxes, pull boxes or similar areas of access required by other trades.

3. All ceiling hung cable hooks shall be mounted close enough together such that upon completion of the station cable installation a minimum amount of cable droop occurs between adjacent rings. The distance between supporting rings shall not exceed 48 inches or as required by the current edition of TIA-569-C.

D. Refer to the separation requirements listed in Section 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling for minimum distances from electrical power and other electro- magnetic sources.

E. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for allowable fill capacity for each size of cable hook.

1. Cable hooks shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 30 pounds with a safety factor of 3.

2. Spring steel cable hooks shall be capable of supporting a minimum of 100 pounds with a safety factor of 3 where extra strength is required.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

3. Where aggregate cable bundle supported by ceiling hung cable hooks exceeds either the rated cable or weight load limit of the ceiling hung cable hook system, provide ceiling basket tray – Type CTW – as specified in Section 27 05 36.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES SECTION 270533-1

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 0533 - CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section
B. Related work:

1. Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching.

2. Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications.

3. Section 27 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

4. Section 27 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems

5. Section 27 05 33 – Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems

6. Section 27 05 36 – Cable Trays for Communications Systems

7. Section 27 05 39 – Surface Raceways for Communications Systems

8. Section 27 05 43 – Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems

9. Section 27 05 48 – Noise and Vibration for Communications Systems

10. Section 27 10 00 – Structured Cabling, Basic Materials and Methods

11. Section 27 13 00 – Communications Interior Backbone Cabling

12. Section 27 14 00 – Communications Outside Plant Backbone Cabling

13. Section 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide telecommunications pathways in accordance with the CEC, ANSI/TIA-569-C (2012) Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, as specified in this Section and as shown on the plans, whichever is most restrictive. Provide system furniture pathways in accordance with UL 1286.

B. Provision of all low voltage Communications Systems Pathway, including:

1. Rigid steel conduit and fittings.

2. PVC insulated rigid steel conduit and fittings.

3. Intermediate metal conduit and fittings.

4. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings.

5. Non-metallic raceway and fittings.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES SECTION 270533-2

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

6. Flexible metallic conduit and fittings.

7. Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit and fittings.

8. Miscellaneous conduit fittings and products.

9. Terminal cabinets and pull boxes

10. Junction Boxes

11. Device Boxes

12. Floor Boxes
C. Provide fire penetration sealant systems at all rated wall and floor/ceiling penetrations as required. Additionally, provide where indicated, which may be in excess of Code but required to meet City’s operational and functional requirements.

D. At Hazardous Occupancies, installation conforms to the requirements of National Electric Code for Class and Division rating of spaces.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Per Division 1 and the following:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
a. ANSI C80.1 1994 Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated
b. ANSI C80.3 1991 Electrical Metallic Tubing - Zinc Coated c. ANSI/TIA-569-C (2012) Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

2. American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials b. ASTM E 119 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials c. ASTM E 814 Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems

3. BICSI
a. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) b. Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual (ITSIMM)

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a. NEMA 250-2003 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
b. NEMA FB 1 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1-2003) Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable c. FB 2.10 2000 Selection and Installation Guidelines For Fittings For Use With Non-Flexible Metallic Conduit Or Tubing (Rigid Metal Conduit, Intermediate Metal Conduit, And Electrical Metallic Tubing). d. FB 2.20 2000 Selection and Installation Guidelines for Fittings for use with Flexible Electrical Conduit and Cable
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES SECTION 270533-3

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
e. NEMA ICS 6 1988 (Rev. 1) Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems
f. NEMA OS 3-2002 Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes.
g. NEMA RN 1-1998 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. h. NEMA TC 7 2000 Smooth Wall Coilable Polyethylene Electrical Plastic Duct
i. NEMA TC 13 2000 Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT). j. NEMA TC 14 1984(R 1986) Filament-Wound Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings

5. National Fire Protection Association
a. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code

6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
a. UL 1 - 2000 Flexible Metal Conduit
b. UL 6 - 2004 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel
c. UL 50 - (1995; R 1999, Bul. 2001) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment d. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials e. UL 360 - 1986 (Bul. 1991) (R 1993) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit f. UL 514A - 1991 (R 2004) Metallic Outlet Boxes
g. UL 514B - 1989 (R 2004) Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings h. UL 514C - 1996 (R 2000) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers.
i. UL 651 - 1989 (R 1989) (Bul. 1993) Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
j. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials k. UL 797 - 1993 (R 2004) Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel l. UL 1242 - 1983 (R1993) (Bul. 1993) Intermediate Metal Conduit. m. UL 1286 (1999; R 2001, Bul. 2002) Office Furnishings n. UL 1479 Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops
o. UL Fire Resistance Directories

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification, Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications and the following:

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification, Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications and the following:

B. All materials, equipment and parts comprising the units specified herein shall be new and unused, and of current manufacturer.

C. Only products and applications listed in this Section may be used on the project unless otherwise submitted and approved by the City’s Representative.

D. Comply with Section 27 00 00 Communications General Requirements.

E. Firestopping installations shall use only complete systems purchased as a whole unit.

Firestopping using individual material components or parts/materials collected from multiple kits is prohibited.

F. The firestopping systems used shall be tested and qualified for the purpose by an independent Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. Mortar, grout and similar substances shall not be used to seal telecommunications openings in a fire-rated wall, ceiling or floor.

G. Mortar may be used to fill the annular space around a sleeve only if such material and application meets the requirements of the California Building Code Section 713, paragraph 713.3.1.

H. Firestopping products shall bear the classification marking of the qualified testing and inspection agency.

1. Installation shall be by qualified and trained technicians. The Contractor shall, at their expense, replace entirely any firestop system installed by an uncertified installer. Minimum installer qualifications are as follows:
a. FM Research approved in accordance with FM AS 4991.
b. Certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary staff, training and a minimum of 1 year experience in the installation of the manufacturer's products per specified requirements.

I. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the Installer.

The Installer shall have been trained by a direct representative of the manufacturer (not a distributor or sales agent) in the proper selection and installation procedures.

1.6 DELIVERY HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide the following types of conduit systems listed by their commonly used generic name.

2.2 RACEWAY
A. Manufacturers:

1. Raceway:
a. Allied Tube and Conduit Co.
b. Triangle PWC, Inc.
c. Western Tube and Conduit Corp.
d. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
e. Occidental Coating Co. (OCAL).
f. Alflex Corp.
g. American Flexible Metal Conduit Co.
h. Anaconda.
i. Or equal.

2. Fittings:
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. OZ/Gedney.
c. Thomas & Betts Corp.
d. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
e. Occidental Coating Co. (OCAL).
f. Carlon.
g. or equal.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit.

1. Drawing and Spec Reference: RSC.

2. Construction:
a. Conduit: Full weight, threaded, hot-dip galvanized steel, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
b. Standard threaded couplings, locknuts, bushings, and elbows: Only materials of steel or malleable iron are acceptable. Locknuts shall be bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal wall of an enclosure.
c. Three piece couplings: Electroplated, cast malleable iron. d. Insulating bushings: Threaded polypropylene or thermosetting phenolic rated 150 degree C minimum.
e. Insulated grounding bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with insulated throat and steel "lay-in" ground lug with compression screw. f. Insulated metallic bushings: Threaded cast malleable iron body with plastic insulated throat rated 150 degrees C.
g. All fittings and connectors shall be threaded.

C. Coated Rigid Steel Conduit:

1. Drawing and Spec Reference: CRSC.

2. Conduit: Full weight, threaded, hot-dip galvanized steel, conforming to ANSI C80.1 and NEMA RN-1 with nominal 40 mil thermoplastic vinyl coating, heat fused and bonded to the exterior of the conduit.

3. Fittings:
a. Conduit couplings and connectors shall be as specified for galvanized rigid steel conduit and shall be factory PVC coated with an insulating jacket equivalent to that of the coated material.
b. Fittings over-sleeve to extend 1 conduit diameter or 1-1/2" beyond fitting, whichever is less.

4. Performance:
a. Tensile Strength: 3500 psi.

5. Approvals:
a. NEMA RN1 (Type 40 - 40 mils thick)
b. CalTrans Type 2

6. Manufacturers:
a. Plastibond by RobRoy Industries.
b. Occal-40 by Occidental Coating Company.
c. KorKap by Plastic Applicators.
d. Ocal-Blue
e. or equal.

D. Intermediate Metal Conduit

1. Drawing Reference: IMC
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES SECTION 270533-7

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

2. Conduit: Hot dip galvanized steel meeting the requirements of NEC Article 345 and conforming to ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

3. Fittings: Conduit couplings, connector and bushing shall be as specified for galvanized rigid steel conduit. Integral retractable type IMC couplings are also acceptable.

E. Electrical Metallic Tubing.

1. Drawing and Spec Reference: EMT.

2. Conduit: Shall be formed of cold rolled strip steel, electrical resistance welded continuously along the longitudinal seam and hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Conduit shall conform to ANSI C80.3 specifications and shall meet UL classifications.

3. Set screw type couplings: Electroplated, steel or cast malleable iron, UL listed concrete tight. Use set screw type couplings with four setscrews each of conduit sizes over 2 inches. Setscrews shall be of case hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.

4. Set screw type connectors: Electroplated steel or cast malleable iron UL listed concrete tight with male hub and insulated plastic throat, 150 degree C temperature rated. Setscrew shall be same as for couplings.

5. Raintight couplings: Electroplate steel or cast malleable iron; UL listed raintight and concrete tight, using gland and ring compression type construction.

6. Raintight connectors: Electroplated steel or cast malleable iron, UL listed raintight and concrete tight, with insulated throat, using gland and ring compression type construction.

F. Flexible Conduit:

1. Drawing Reference: FLEX

2. Construction:
a. Flexible steel, zinc coated on both inside and outside by hot-dipping process.
b. Interlocking spirally wound continuous steel strip.
c. 3/4" minimum size.

3. Fittings: Connectors shall be of the single screw clamp variety with steel or cast malleable iron bodies and threaded male hubs with insulated throats. Exception:

Pressure cast screw-in connectors shall be acceptable for fixture connection in suspended ceilings and cut-in outlet boxes within existing furred walls.

4. Approvals:
a. UL 1
G. Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit

1. Drawing Reference: Liquidtight
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES SECTION 270533-8

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

2. Conduit: Shall be fabricated in continuous lengths from galvanized steel strips, interlocking spirally wound, covered with extruded liquidtight jacket of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and conforming to UL 360. Provide conduit with a continuous copper-bonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions.

3. Fittings: Connector body and gland nut shall be of cadmium plated steel or cast malleable iron, with tapered, male, threaded hub; insulated throat and neoprene "O" ring gasket recessed into the face of the stop nut. The clamping gland shall be of molded nylon with an integral brass push-in ferrule.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUIT FITTINGS AND PRODUCTS
A. General

1. UL 514B.

2. Listed in UL Electrical Construction Materials List.

B. Conduit Fittings, Insulated Throat Grounding Bushings

1. Description
a. Threaded for Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. b. UL Listed for use with copper conductors.
c. Thermoplastic insulated liner for 105 degrees Celsius. d. Body of malleable iron, zinc plated; or die cast zinc.

2. Manufacturer
a. Thomas & Betts (Steel City) BG-801 Series
b. O-Z/Gedney
c. or equal.

C. Watertight conduit entrance seals: Steel or cast malleable iron bodies and pressure clamps with PVC sleeve, neoprene sealing grommets and PVC coated steel pressure rings. Fittings shall be supplied with neoprene sealing rings between the body and PVC sleeve.

D. Watertight cable sealing bushings: One piece, compression molded sealing ring with PVC coated steel pressure disks, stainless steel sealing screws and zinc plated cast malleable iron locking collar.

E. Expansion fittings: Multi-piece unit comprised of a hot dip galvanized malleable iron or steel body and outside pressure bussing designed to allow a maximum of 4" conduit movement (2" in either direction). Furnish with external braid tinned copper bonding jumper. Unit shall be UL listed for wet or dry locations.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
F. Expansion/deflection couplings: Multi-piece unit comprised of a neoprene sleeve with internal flexible tinned copper braid attached to bronze end couplings with stainless steel bands. Coupling shall accommodate .75-inch deflection, expansion, or contraction in any direction, and allow 30-degree angular deflections. Flexible, corrosion-resistant, watertight, moisture and heat resistant molded rubber jacket and stainless steel jacket clamps. Unit shall comply with UL467 and UL514.

1. Manufacturer:
a. OZ/Gedney Type DX
b. Steel City Type EDF
c. or equal.

G. Standard products not herein specified:

1. Submit for review a listing of standard electrical conduit hardware and fittings not herein specified prior to use or installation, i.e. locknuts, bushings, etc.

2. Listing shall include manufacturers name, part numbers, and a written description of the item indicating type of material and construction.

3. Miscellaneous components shall be equal in quality, material, and construction to similar items herein specified.

H. Hazardous area fittings: UL listed for the application.

I. Elbow fittings with internal cable radius management.

1. Minimum Features/Functions/Construction:
a. Right angle transition (LB type) fittings incorporate internal cable radius management intended for use with structured cabling.
b. Internal construction meets ANSI/TIA 568 and NECA/FOA bend radius. c. Die cast aluminum construction
d. Gray powder coat paint ﬁnish
e. Suitable for indoor, outdoor (OSP) & plenum use.
f. Includes gasketed cover for wet locations.
g. Suitable for use with EMT, IMC, Rigid or Liquid-Tight conduit and ﬁttings.

2. Manufacturers
a. Madison Electric Products, Inc. Smart LB Conduit Body b. Or equal (no known equal).

2.4 BOXES AND ENCLOSURES
A. Junction and Device Boxes

1. Drawing References: As shown on Symbol Schedule
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES SECTION 270533-10

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

2. Construction:
a. General
b. One or two piece welded knockout boxes.
1) Interior
a) UL 514A, cadmium or zinc-coated 1.25 oz/sq. ft., if
ferrous metal.
b) UL 514C approved if non-metallic.
2) Exterior - Conform to the Junction and/or PullBox construction scheduled on the Plans. Where construction not otherwise scheduled or noted on the plans, conform to the following:
a) Cast iron or aluminum with threaded hubs and mounting lugs.
b) Gasketed cover with spring lid.
c. If size not otherwise noted, at least 4S (4" square) by 2-1/8" deep, or Code minimum size, whichever is larger.
d. Provide complete with approved type of connectors and required accessories, including attachment lugs or hangers. Provide raised device covers as required to accept scheduled device.
e. Concealed/Flush Mounted
1) Provide Flush Mount Device Boxes unless otherwise indicated. 2) At gypsum wall assemblies, hollow masonry, tile walls and plaster walls, provide with device rings as required.
f. Surface Mounted
1) Match Backbox to Device plate such that no sharp edges or voids remain exposed to the public.
g. Concrete floor embedded:
1) Cast iron concrete pour boxes with screwed brass cover, unless otherwise noted.
2) Cadmium plated screw cover attachment at least 6" on center.

3. Approvals.
a. UL 514A
b. UL 514C, if non-metallic

4. Manufacturers:
a. Interior:
1) Steel City.
2) Bowers
3) Thomas and Betts
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES SECTION 270533-11

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
4) or equal.
b. Exterior, exposed with cover of same construction.
1) Appleton
2) Pyle-National
3) or equal.
c. Other conditions:
1) Any meeting approvals and requirements.

B. 5” Square Device Box

1. Drawing References: As indicated on Symbol Schedule

2. Construction
a. 5 in. square x 2.875 in. deep metal backbox with an integral cable management system.
b. Use on Class 2 and Class 3 Remote-Control, Signaling and Power- Limited Circuits only.

3. Manufacturer
a. Randl Industries, Inc. 5 Square Telecommunications Outlet Box T-55017 with D-51G000 one gang ring.
b. Or equal.

2.5 TERMINAL BOXES, PULL CANS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Terminal Cabinets:

1. Drawing Reference: As Scheduled.

2. Construction:
a. General
1) Interior dimensions not less than those scheduled.
2) Door face to be not less than 95% of panel interior dimensions. 3) Provide with 3/4" fire retardant treated ply backboard where device termination scheduled/required within enclosure
b. Interior Application
c. Zinc Coated Sheet Steel, code gauge with standard concentric knockouts for conduit terminations.
d. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray baked enamel finish. e. Flush mounted enclosure covers: Trim fitted, continuous hinged steel door, flush catch - lockable and keyed to match. Screw fastened doors not acceptable.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
f. Surface mount cabinets shall be furnished with screw cover trim, flush hinged door and shall not be less than 6 inches deep.
g. Exterior Applications
1) Door and lock arrangement as required by manufacturer to maintain specified rating.

3. Mounting:
a. Flush mount cabinets shall be furnished with concealed trim clamps and shall be not less than 4 inches deep or as scheduled, whichever is greater

4. Approvals
a. Interior Applications:
1) NEMA 250 Type 1, unless otherwise noted. Refer to plans and schedules.
b. Exterior Applications:
1) NEMA 250 Type - As scheduled, not less than NEMA 3R.

Provide NEMA 4 and 4X where scheduled or where required to match installation conditions.

5. Manufacturers, Metallic Enclosures:
a. B-Line Electrical Enclosures
b. Circle AW Products.
c. Hammond
d. Henessey.
e. Hoffman.
f. Myers Electric Products
g. Rittal.
h. or equal.

6. Manufacturers, Non-metallic Enclosures
a. Stahlin Enclosures
b. Cabletek
c. RMS Electronics, Inc
d. STI, Inc
e. Vynckier Inc.
f. Or equal.

2.6 WALL BOXES
A. Flat-panel Wall Box

1. Spec Reference: FPWB
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES SECTION 270533-13

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

2. Features, functions and construction:
a. Box provides means to install audiovisual, network and power receptacles flush in wall behind flat-panel display. With box cover installed, connectors are concealed and cables, both power and communications pass through slot at base of cover plate into connection points on back of flat-panel.
b. Cover plate protrudes less than 1/2" from face of wall. c. 16 gauge box construction with 1/16" inch thick minimum cover plate, white finish baked enamel or powder coat, field paintable d. Box incorporates provisions to mount up to two electrical device boxes for provision of duplex power receptacles either from above or below. e. Additionally box mounts manufacturers low-voltage conduit entry box which accommodates manufacturer's line of audiovisual connector inserts. Design of FP WB permits installation of up to two low-voltage conduit entry boxes, which may be mounted either above or below the FPWB.
f. Manufacturers audiovisual insert line shall support at least the following receptacles:
1) BNC, in combinations of 1 to 5 BNC's, color-coded for composite, component analog and RGBHV video formats, as required.
2) RCA, in combinations of 1 to 3 RCA's color-coded for composite and component analog video formats, as required. 3) XLR, 3 and 4 pin.
4) DB-15
5) DB-9
6) Neutrik Speakon.
7) DVI
8) HDMI
9) 1/4" and mini TRS.
g. Fill unused openings with blank inserts.

3. Manufacturers:
a. FSR Inc.
1) PWB-100, with connectors and inserts from manufacturer's IPS series as required to provide the required interfaces and connectivity.
2) PWB-250, with connectors and inserts from manufacturer's IPS series Is required to provide the required interfaces and connectivity.
3) Wiremold ESW
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES SECTION 270533-14

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
b. Or equal.

2.7 FLOOR BOXES, POKE-THROUGHS AND MONUMENTS
A. Floor Box, Cast Iron, Recessed Devices, with Lid Designed to meet UL Scrub Water Listing

1. Spec Reference: FC3

2. Construction
a. At grade conditions, Cast Iron, suitable for grade installation without special means of protection. Elsewhere, cast iron or stamped steel. b. Four 1-Gang openings divisible between power and low voltage applications fully recessed below the floor level
c. Slotted and gasketed activation cover provides protection for both communications and electrical receptacles at box interior. Activation cover has removable recesses to permit installation of pieces of surrounding flooring finish to be integrated in lid to minimize visual appearance of lid. Activation covers shall be manufactured of die-cast aluminum or die-cast zinc, and be available in a brushed aluminum finish, plated brass finish, or a powder-coated paint finish - to be selected by City’sRepresentative. Activation covers shall be available in flanged and flangeless versions - select to match surrounding floor covering.

Covers shall be available with options for tile or carpet inserts, flush covers, or covers with one 1" trade size screw plug opening and one combination 1 1/4" and 2" trade size screw plug openings for furniture feed applications. Covers, when open, provides at least 35 square inches of clear opening to access receptacles at box interior. d. Cables can be routed internally between two adjacent 1 gang openings to permit a single conduit to serve both.
e. UL Listed for power service.
f. Lid rated for 900 pound load without damage.
g. At above grade conditions, 2 or 3 hour classified floor box – select to meet requirements of installation condition.

3. Approvals:
a. UL 514C scrub water
b. 2 and 3 hour fire rating per UL 263 at applications above grade level.

4. Manufacturers
a. Wiremold RFB4S-FC or RFB4S-FC12 above grade and RFB4-CI-1 at grade conditions. Provide FloorPort Flanged Cover Assemblies to match floor conditions, City’s Representative's finish selection, and exit raceway, where indicated. Provide internal device brackets to match specified communications devices and plates. Coordinate electrical rough-in with requirements of Division 26. Provide rough-in as required to mount specified communications fill.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
b. Thomas & Betts
c. Hubbell
d. or approved equal
B. Floor Box High Capacity, 3 Compartment

1. Spec Reference: FC4, FW4, FR4

2. Features
a. UL Listed
b. Box
1) Size at least 10 inches by 12 inches by 6 inches deep. 2) Three compartments, with voltage barriers, with standard electrical plate mounting brackets for at least:
a) One single gang
b) One 2 gang
c) One 4 gang
c. Knockouts concentric, combination 1 inch and 1.25 inch. d. Select cover for to match floor finish as scheduled in. 1) At carpet floor surfaces, provide with carpet flange and coordinate carpet cut and insertion.
2) At smooth finish floor surfaces, including exposed concrete, provide smooth cover and omit carpet flange.
e. Cover size approximately 10.5 inches by 12.5 inches. 1) At least 11 gage steel.
2) Carpet flange of mitered brass or aluminum edging.
3) Option of brass or aluminum to be selected by the City's Representative.
4) Option of 0.25 inch or 0.5 inch flange height to be selected by the City's Representative.
5) Option for solid aluminum cover with no carpet flange. f. Within cover, provide a lift-off, full-access door, open area approximately 6.5 inches by 8 inches.
g. Within the lift-off, full-access door, provide a hinged, fold-back cable exit port.
h. Open area of cable pass-through approximately 2 inches by 2 inches. i. Flush in closed position.

3. Applications:
a. FC4: Concrete floor systems. Provide "pour pan" protection or manufacturer’s equivalent protection system at slab on grade conditions.

At upper floor conditions, provide UL listed 3 hour rated assembly per UL 263.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
b. FR4: Raised Floor Conditions.
c. FW4: Wooden Floor Conditions.

4. Approvals:
a. UL 514A scrub water

5. Manufacturers
a. FSR Inc.
1) FC4: FL-500P-(cover flange code)-6. Supply larger boxes where scheduled and indicated plates and jacks require it. a) Provide manufacturer's “Pour Pan” FL-GRD2 or FL-
GRD4 to protect from moisture at installations at grade level.
b) At floor levels above grade, provide FL-500P-6-FRK
system with required cover.
2) FW4, FR4: FL-540P-(cover flange code)-4. Supply larger boxes where scheduled and indicated plates and jacks require it. b. RCI Systems, Inc.
1) FC4: FB-2600. Supply larger boxes where scheduled and indicated plates and jacks require it.
a) Provide manufacturer's “Pour Pan” to protect from
moisture at installations at grade level.
c. Wiremold Evolution Floor Box, EFB8S, EFBS-OG where installed at grade, EFB8S-FC, at upper floor/ceiling assemblies with a 2–hour or less fire rating.
d. Hubbell
e. Or approved equal.

C. Floor Box High Capacity, 4 Compartment

1. Spec Reference: FC6, FW6, FR6

2. Features
a. UL Listed
b. Box
1) Size at least 13.5 inches by 12 inches by 6 inches deep. 2) Four compartments, with voltage barriers, with standard electrical plate mounting brackets for at least:
a) One 6 gang
b) One 3 gang
c) Two single gang
c. Knockouts concentric, combination 1 inch and 1.25 inch.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
d. Select cover for to match floor finish
1) At carpet floor surfaces provide with carpet flange and coordinate carpet cut and insertion.
2) At smooth finish floor surfaces, including exposed concrete, provide smooth cover and omit carpet flange.
e. Cover size approximately 14 inches by 12.5 inches.
f. At least 11 gage steel.
g. Carpet flange of mitered brass or aluminum edging.
1) Option of brass or aluminum to be selected by the City’s Representative.
2) Option of 0.25 inch or 0.5 inch flange height to be selected by the City’s Representative.
h. Within cover, provide a lift-off, full-access door, open area approximately 6.5 inches by 8 inches.
i. Within the lift-off, full-access door, provide a hinged, fold-back cable exit port.
j. Open area of cable pass-through approximately 2 inches by 2 inches. k. Flush in closed position.

3. Applications:
a. FC6: Concrete floor systems. Provide "pour pan" protection or manufacturer’s equivalent protection system at slab on grade conditions.

At upper floor conditions, provide UL listed 3 hour rated assembly per UL 263.
b. FR6: Raised Floor Conditions.
c. FW6: Wooden Floor Conditions.

4. Approvals:
a. UL 514A scrub water
b. UL 263 at applications above grade level.

5. Manufacturers
a. FSR Inc.
1) FC6: FL-600P-(cover flange code)-6. Supply larger boxes where scheduled and indicated plates and jacks require it. a) Provide manufacturer's “Pour Pan” FL-GRD2 or FL-
GRD4 to protect from moisture at installations at grade level.
b) At floor levels above grade, provide FL-605P-6-FRK
system with required cover.
2) FW6, FR6: FL-640P-(cover flange code)-6. Supply larger boxes where scheduled and indicated plates and jacks require it.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
b. RCI Systems, Inc.
c. Wiremold
d. Hubbell
e. or approved equal.

D. Floor Box, Electrified Furniture Feed

1. Spec Reference: EFM, FF4

2. Minimum Box Features/Function/Construction:
a. Stamped steel or cast construction
1) If stamped steel, provide painted with a fusion-bonded epoxy designed for use on metal reinforcement bar and related accessories before encapsulation in concrete,
b. Approved for use on grade and above grade floors.
c. The box shall have nominal dimensions of 13 1/8" L x 12 1/2" W x 3 1/4" H
d. Six independent wiring compartments that allow capacity for up to six duplex receptacles and/or communication services.
e. Construction permits feed through tunneling from adjacent compartments.
f. Two of the six compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity of 23 cu in.
g. Four compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity of 52cu in. h. The box have at least the following number of trade standard conduit knockouts:
1) Twelve ¾".
2) Four 1",
3) Twelve 1 1/4".
i. The box shall be fully adjustable, providing at least 1 3/8" of pre-pour adjustment, and at least 3/4" of after-pour adjustment. j. The box shall provide a series of device mounting plates that will accept both duplex power devices, as well as plates that will accommodate Project standard workstation connectivity outlets and modular inserts, and other open system devices.

3. Minimum Cover/Lid Features/Function/Construction:
a. Flanged cover for use in tile or carpet installation. b. Die-cast aluminum assembly available in black, bronze, brass, nickel, gray, or brushed aluminum for color selection by the City's Representative.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
c. Provided with one 1" trade size screw plug for power or communication type cabling and one combination 1 1/4" and 2" trade size screw plug for communication type cabling.
d. Allows for feeding both power and communication cabling.

4. Approvals:
a. UL
b. The activation cover shall have been evaluated by UL to meet the applicable U.S. safety standards for scrub water exclusion when used on tile, terrazzo, wood, and carpet covered floors.

5. Manufacturers:
a. Wiremold RFB6-OG with FloorPort Series Cover FPFFTC**, where ** reflects the color option selected by the City’s Representative. b. Hubbell
c. FSR
d. or approved equal.

2.8 THROUGH PENETRATION SEALING SYSTEMS
A. Through Penetration Sealant Assembly, Re-Enterable (Zero Maintenance)

1. Drawing Reference: TPSR and as required at all new through penetrations through rated partitions.

2. Application
a. Provide at all locations where open wire communications cabling penetrates fire-rated assemblies in basket tray, cable tray or supported by J-hooks. Zero-maintenance firestop assemblies shall be used when the pathway on one or both sides of the wall, ceiling or floor is open, such as J-hooks or cable tray.
b. Communications conduit sleeves through a single fire-rated wall shall not be used. For these applications, a zero-maintenance firestop assembly is required.

3. Functions
a. Cables passing through fire-rated floors or walls shall pass through fire- rated assemblies which can be used by the Sacramento Public Library’s technical staff to add and remove cabling without having to apply or remove putty fill, backing or similar compounds to maintain the necessary fire rating.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
b. Through penetration system to feature either automatic self adjustment mechanisms, or integral mechanical adjustment mechanisms to permit the Sacramento Public Library’sstaff to adapt the assembly to the fill condition without need for supplementary or disposable materials. The assembly shall contain a self-contained sealing system which shall automatically adjust to the installed cable loading and shall permit cables to be installed, removed or retrofitted without the need to adjust, remove or reinstall firestop material.
c. Assemblies shall have an F Rating and T Rating equal to the rating of the barrier in which the device is installed, where such is performance is required by Code.
d. Assembly size and quantity shall be determined as follows:
1) For round openings, the fill ratio of cabling-to-opening-size shall not exceed 40%, or as dictated by the manufacturer, whichever is more stringent.
2) For rectangular openings, the fill ratio of cabling-to-opening size shall not exceed 50%, or as dictated by the manufacturer, whichever is more stringent.
3) Include in the cabling cross-sectional area enough spare capacity to accommodate 50% growth. Upon commissioning, if adequate spare capacity is not observed, the contractor shall install additional assemblies at their own cost to provide such spare capacity

4. Approvals:
a. California State Fire Marshal.
b. Tested to UL 1479
c. UL 2043

5. Manufacturers - Select for application:
a. Specified Technologies Inc. EZ-Path Fire Rated Pathway b. Wiremold FlameStopper
c. Hilti CP 653 Speedsleeve
d. or equal.

B. Firestopping for Conduits and Other Closed Pathways

1. Approvals: California State Fire Marshal

2. Tested to UL 1479 or ASTM E814.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Specified Technologies, Inc.
b. 3M
c. or equal.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUIT APPLICATION
A. General: Install the following types of conduits and fittings in the locations listed, unless otherwise noted in the drawings:

1. Exterior, Exposed:
a. Type RSC for applications up to 8 feet AFF or to first pull box, whichever is first, applications subject to physical abuse or for applications greater than 4" diameter.
b. EMT acceptable in all other applications not noted above up to 4" diameter, where used in conjunction with specified Raintight (compression) couplers.

2. Interior, Exposed, Wet and Damp Locations:
a. Type RSC.
b. At interior locations over 8 feet above finished floor, EMT acceptable.

3. Interior, Hazardous Locations
a. Type RSC
b. Type IMC, where permitted by the NEC.

4. Interior, exposed or concealed, dry locations:
a. RSC, if subject to physical abuse.
b. EMT, if not subject to physical abuse.

5. Interior, concealed, damp locations, including in masonry walls. a. RSC

6. Embedded in Concrete
a. RSC or rigid non-metallic conduit.
b. PVC Type DB-120.

7. Transition from walls to open plan furniture systems:
a. Liquidtight

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions and conform thereto.

B. Distribution Pathway via EMT Raceway:

1. The EMT conduit is to be installed meeting the NEC handbook Article 348 Installation Specifications.

2. Provide escutcheon plates for all through wall conduit stubs.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

3. All ends of conduits shall be cut square, reamed and fitted with insulated bushing.

4. All conduit which passes through fire walls shall be sealed with fire stop putty after all station wire has been installed.

3.3 MOUNTING AND INSTALLATION - BOXES AND ENCLOSURES
A. Conform to the more restrictive of NEMA OS 3-2002 and the following.

B. Provide backboxes at all communications systems devices. Installation of device plates directly to wall surface without use of a backbox, unless specifically directed on plans, is unacceptable.

C. The distance between pull boxes shall not exceed 150 feet or more than two 90 degree bends.

D. Align boxes plumb with floor and surrounding construction. At door frames, locate 4" from frame. Verify placement with City’s Representative details to ensure that box clears all trim, etc.

E. Support and fasten boxes securely. At stud walls use rigid bar hangers, attached to hanger with stud and nut.

F. At existing locations, provide cutting, patching and finishing as required to maintain or restore finishes so that resulting installation is integrated into the Architectural decor of the particular location.

G. Mounting Height: the mounting height of a wall-mounted outlet box is defined as the height from the finished floor to the horizontal center line of the cover plate.

H. Mount outlet boxes with the long axis vertical. Three or more gang boxes shall be mounted with the long axis horizontal.

I. Install wiring jacks and outlet devices only in boxes which are clean; free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris.

J. Install wiring jacks and outlet devices after wiring work is complete.

3.4 SUPPORT
A. Provide supports for raceways as specified in Section 27 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.

B. All raceways installed in exposed dry locations shall be grouped in a like arrangement and supported by means of conduit straps, wall brackets or trapeze hangers in accordance with Code and the requirements of the this Section. Fasten all hangers from the building structural system.

C. Provide supports and mounting attachments per the most restrictive of Code and the following.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Raceway
Size
(inches)
No of
cables
in run
Location Support
Spacing (feet)

RSC EMT
Horizontal Runs
½, 3/4 1-2 Flat Ceiling Wall Runs 5 5
½, 3/4 1-2 Where access limited to building
structure
7 7
½, 3/4 3≥ Any location 7 7
1≥ 1-2 Flat ceiling or wall 6 6
1≥ 1-2 Where access limited to building
structure
10 10
1≥ 3≥ Any locations 10 10
Any Any Concealed 10 10
Vertical Runs
½, 3/4 Any Exposed 7 7
1, 1-1/4 Any Exposed 8 8
1-1/2≥ Any Exposed 10 10
D. Install no more than one coupling or device between supports.

E. Conduit support

1. As specified in Section 27 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems
F. Gypsum Wall Board Penetrations: Provide circular penetrations maximum 1/8" inch larger than outer diameter of conduit being used. On both sides of the wall fill space between conduit and wall with joint compound, depth to match gypsum board thickness.

G. All communications systems conduit openings in walls and floors are the responsibility of the Contractor. Install sleeves shown on the drawings when the concrete is poured.

Any openings required after the concrete has set maybe core drilled per the procedures outlined above.

H. Patching and Restoring Work

1. General
a. Patching shall achieve security, strength, and weather protection, as applicable, and shall preserve continuity of existing fire ratings. b. Upon completion of cutting and coring, clean remaining surfaces of loose particles and dust.
c. Patch existing construction by filling repairing, refinishing, closing up and similar operations. Patching includes the insertion or projection of other products in or from a surface.
d. Patch weather-exposed components in a manner that restores them to a weathertight condition.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
e. Finish or refinish, as required, cut and patched surfaces to provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance, matching existing adjacent. Finish complete surface plane, unless otherwise indicated. Over patched wall or ceiling surfaces, finish to nearest cutoff line for entire surface, such as intersection with adjacent wall or ceiling, beam, pilasters or to nearest opening frame, unless otherwise indicated.

Finished surfaces shall not present a spotty, touched-up appearance f. Finish or refinish, as required; cut and patch surfaces to match adjacent finishes. Patching shall successfully duplicate undisturbed adjacent finishes, colors, textures, and profiles. Where there is dispute as to whether duplication is successful or has been achieved to a reasonable degree, the City’s Representative’s judgment shall be final.

3.5 THROUGH PENETRATIONS SEALANT SYSTEMS
A. At a minimum, follow all manufacturer instructions. In case of discrepancy between manufacturer and contractor requirements, the more stringent shall apply. In the case of conflicting instructions, report any discrepancy to the City’s Representative in a timely fashion so as not to impact the construction timeline.

B. Application: Through Penetration Sealant Assemblies, Renenterable

1. Zero-maintenance firestop assemblies shall be used when the pathway on one or both sides of the wall, ceiling or floor is open, such as J-hooks or cable tray.

2. Communications cable tray or ladder rack shall not be continued through a fire- rated wall. Stop the tray or ladder rack, install multiple zero- maintenance firestop assemblies as needed, and continue the tray or ladder rack on the other side. Ensure grounding of the cable tray is continuous through the wall.

3. Communications conduit sleeves through a single fire-rated wall shall not be used. For these applications, a zero-maintenance firestop assembly is required.

C. Application: Firestopping for Conduits and Other Closed Pathways

1. Firestopping is required for all fire-rated penetrations where a communications conduit or other closed pathway penetrates one or more membranes of a fire- rated wall floor or ceiling

2. Required for all telecommunications outlets located on fire-rated walls. Systems shall be UL CLIV tested
D. For all penetrations for communications openings through fire-rated walls, floors and ceilings, install the same manufacturer’s product for that type of penetration throughout the project.

E. Coordinate with all other trades prior to installation:

1. To ensure that through penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

2. To ensure that sizing of openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems is appropriate.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
F. All penetrations through fire-rated building structures (walls, ceilings and floors) shall be sealed with an appropriate firestop system that at least matches the fire rating of the structure. This requirement applies to through penetrations (complete penetration) and membrane penetrations (through one side of a hollow fire-rated structure).

1. Any penetrating item i.e., riser slots, cables, conduit, cable tray, and raceways, etc. shall be properly firestopped.

2. Through penetrations shall be sealed on both sides of the structure.

3. Telecommunications outlet back-boxes installed in fire-rated walls shall be completely enclosed in an appropriate firestopping assembly within the wall.

4. Conduit sleeves shall not be used for penetrating fire-rated floors, ceilings and walls. A zero-maintenance firestop assembly shall be used instead.

G. Verify the locations of all fire-rated walls prior to installation.

H. Firestopping assemblies must make a gas, smoke and water tight seal when activated in a fire.

I. Multiple cable bundles planned to penetrate a fire-rated wall and entering the same space within 10 feet of each other shall be consolidated in to a single penetration, unless one or both penetrations are membrane penetrations.

J. Ambient Conditions:

1. Do not install firestopping products when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside the limitations recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Do not install firestopping products when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

3. Maintain the minimum temperature before, during, and for a minimum 3 days after installation of materials.

K. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of the penetrating item (e.g., conduit) installation but prior to the covering or concealing of openings.

L. Before beginning installation:

1. Examine and clean the affected surfaces, as they shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, scale, laitance, rust, release agents, water repellants, and any other substances that may inhibit optimum adhesion.

2. Provide masking and temporary covering to protect adjacent surfaces.

3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

M. After installation:

1. Remove equipment, materials, and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

2. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed openings to be free of excess firestopping materials and soiling as work progresses.

3. Do not cover installed firestopping assemblies until inspected by the City’s Representative.

N. All firestop systems (including the cabling through them) and identification labels shall be installed prior to the City Representative’s above-ceiling inspection.

O. Labeling

1. At all firestop locations, install a permanent label near the firestop on each side of the wall, ceiling or floor. Labels shall be pre-printed and include:
a. Manufacturer of the firestop.
b. Name of product and UL System Number.
c. Name of installer and company name
d. Date of installation.
e. Rating of the wall/system (F and T ratings).

2. One location may have multiple labels (e.g. for a firestop in the annular space around a conduit penetration and a firestop within the conduit around the cables).

3. Labels shall not be painted over or otherwise obscured or defaced.

3.6 RACEWAY INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Raceway runs are shown schematically. Install concealed unless specifically shown otherwise. Supports, pull boxes, junction boxes and similar generally not indicated.

Provide where designated.

1. Install exposed conduit and raceway parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow the surface contours. Level and square conduit and raceway runs.

2. Raceway runs shall be mechanically and electrically continuous between all each equipment rack and utility demarcation point, receptacle and/or surface raceway strip, as applies.

3. Each conduit shall enter and be securely connected to a cabinet, junction box, pull box, or outlet by means of a locknut on the outside and a bushing on the inside or by means of a liquid-tight, threaded, self-locking, cold-weld type wedge adapter.

4. Bends
a. All bends or elbows shall have a minimum radius as follows:

Conduit Size Min. Radius (Inches)
3/4" 8
1" 12
1-1/4" 18
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES SECTION 270533-27

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
2" 24
2-1/2" 24
3" 30
3-1/2" 30
4" 30
5" 36
6" 42
b.
c. Use factory elbows or machine bends for conduit bends 1-1/4" and larger.

5. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel.

6. Install at least one (1) 3/8", 200 pound strength nylon pull cord in all empty raceways.

7. Raceways crossing building expansion joints or in straight runs exceeding 100 feet shall be provided with UL listed expansion fittings.

8. Install conduit seals and drains to prevent accumulated moisture in conduits from entering Communications System enclosures.

B. Do not install conduit in concrete slabs unless specifically directed by City’s Representative. Embedded conduits in concrete slab walls, and columns shall be installed in center third between upper and lower layers of reinforcing steel as directed by the City’s Representative. Space conduits 8" on center except at cabinet locations where slab thickness shall be increased as directed by the City’s Representative.

C. All conduits to be kept 12" away from steam or hot water lines. Install horizontal conduit and raceway runs below water and steam piping.

D. Conduit dropping down to equipment shall be as straight as possible without any offsets, parallel or perpendicular to walls, ceilings and other building features.

E. Conduit installed on any equipment shall be run symmetrical with the equipment and in such a manner as to:

1. not to be exposed to damage;

2. not interfere with access to components of the equipment that will interfere with maintenance operation or;

3. not to be in a manner that the City’s Representativedeems detrimental to its operation.

F. Whenever an installation such as that listed occurs, the Contractor shall make all necessary changes at no cost to the City.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
G. All cut ends of conduit, scratches, tool marks, etc. on any metallic raceway installed in the ground or on the exterior of the building shall be treated with two coats of specified Touch Up Paint/Tape.

H. All raceways stubbing up into equipment or racks shall be sealed. Raceways with conductors shall be plugged with duct-seal. Spare raceways shall be capped. Prevent foreign matter from entering conduit and raceway; use temporary closure protection.

Replace conduits containing concrete, varnish or other foreign material.

I. Complete installation of conduit and raceway runs before starting installation of cables/wires within conduit and raceway.

J. Use specified conduit and raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated conduit and raceway and suitable for the use and location. Join and terminate conduit and raceway with fittings designed and approved for the purpose of the conduit and raceway system and make up tight.

K. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway and coupling square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

L. Horizontal conduit or EMT runs, where required and permitted, shall be installed as close to ceiling or ceiling beams as practical.

M. Conduit and EMT connected to wall outlets shall be run in such a manner that they will not cross water, steam or waste pipes or radiator branches.

N. Conduit and EMT shall not be run through beams, purlins or columns except where permission is granted by City’s Representative in writing.

O. Bond installed metallic raceway in accordance with the requirements of the NEC.

3.7 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
A. Use rigid steel conduit only.

B. Install UL listed sealing fittings that prevent passage of explosive vapors in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank coverplate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.

C. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated:

1. Where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations.

3.8 REUSE OF EXISTING CONDUIT
A. Existing conduit is to be used as a pathway only where so shown on the drawings.

B. Prior to beginning work involving the use of an existing conduit, the Contractor shall consult with the City’s Representative in order to establish whether or not the conduit contains active service.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
C. If no active service exists within the conduit, all cable is to be removed, and work is to proceed.

D. If active service does exist within the conduit and it has been determined that service needs to be disrupted, then work on that conduit shall not proceed until a schedule of service outage has been established by City’s Representative. Once given permission to proceed, the Contractor shall within the time period of one (1) working day; remove the old cable, install, terminate and test the new cables, and notify the City’s Representative the work using the specific conduit has been completed. The City’s Representative shall be responsible for the disconnection and reconnecting of the active service cross-connects within the terminal closet(s).

E. Conduit preparation procedure:

1. Remove existing Wires and Cables (if any).

2. Run a mandrel ½" smaller than the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit receiving new wires and cables.

3. If the specified size mandrel will not pass through the existing conduit, start with a smaller size mandrel and increase mandrel size until the specified sized mandrel will pass.

4. Run a wire brush and clean rag with an outside diameter 1/8" larger than the inside of the conduit through the conduit receiving new wires and cables.

5. Repeat above until conduit is clean and materials detrimental to the wire and cables to be installed no longer exit conduit with the clean rag.

3.9 STATION CABLE PATHWAY INSTALLATION
A. Cut In Boxes and Station Outlet Boxes:

1. Review the proposed installation height of the WAO’s with theCity Representative at each building, and within each building, at each major change in conditions prior to proceeding.

2. Standard Work Area Outlets (WAO)
a. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, all cut in boxes and surface station outlet boxes installed for conventional application WAO’s in walls with existing electrical receptacles that are installed within 18” of the floor are to be installed at +18” above finished floor) to center. b. Where standard WAO’s are to be installed in walls without electrical receptacles, install new WAO’s at a height of 38" A.F.F.(above finished floor) to center,

3. Wall Telephone WAO’s
a. For WAO’s indicated for use for telephone wall jacks, cut-in boxes are to be installed at a height of 47" A.F.F to top of box.

4. All station outlets shall be installed so that their edges are parallel to the vertical and horizontal edges of the surface on which they are mounted.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

3.10 WIRELESS ACCESS POINT ENCLOSURES
A. Mock Up

1. Prior to installation mockup each wireless access point enclosure for aesthetic review by the City's Representative. Obtain the City Representative’s review prior to proceeding.

B. Installation

1. Conform with the Manufacturers Installation instructions and the following, whichever is more restrictive.

2. Comply with the penetration details in the Drawings where penetrating existing exterior conditions.

3. Select fasteners appropriate to mounting conditions, weight and wind load of enclosure and existing surfaces in accordance with Section 27 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems. Make attachment to building structural elements, not surface finish materials.

4. Install enclosure plumb, parallel and aligned to surrounding surfaces. Center on surrounding architectural features were so directed by the City’s Representative.

5. Seal holes at base of enclosure to provide NEMA 4 functionality as indicated in the manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Paint enclosure and mounting hardware to exactly match surrounding surfaces.

Protect the perimeter of the enclosure during the painting to ensure that operation of the door will not be impaired after painting.

C. Touch Up and Cleaning

1. Clean enclousures to like new condition. Provide Touch up painting and remove sealing debris as required following review by City's Representative of installed condition.

3.11 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANT APPLICATION
A. Examination

1. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance.

2. Verify that joint sizes and surfaces are free of defects and acceptable for installation of joint sealants.

3. Verify joint dimensions and shapes to ensure they are within the sealant manufacturer’s guidelines. Resolve any variances prior to installation. Do not proceed with sealant installation until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Preparation
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES SECTION 270533-31

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

1. Thoroughly clean the areas that the new sealant will contact using a de-greasing solvent not harmful to the environment using the two-rag wipe technique. IPA (isopropyl alcohol) is not a degreasing solvent. The new sealant should have a minimum contact area of 1/4”.

2. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
a. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. b. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
1) Concrete.
2) Masonry.
c. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. d. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
1) Metal.
2) Glass.
3) Porcelain enamel.
4) Glazed ceramic tile.

3. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.

Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

C. Joint Priming

1. Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on pre-construction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3. Allow primer to dry. Do not prime areas that cannot be sealed the same day.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
D. Installation of Sealant Backings

1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material.

E. Installation of Joint Sealants

1. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

2. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

3. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919.

4. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross- sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.

5. Install joint backing to maintain the following joint ratios, but in no case less than 1/4 inch (6 mm):
a. Joints up to 1/2 inch wide: 1:1 width to depth ratio. b. Joints Greater than 1/2 inch wide: 2:1 width to depth ratio; maximum 1/2 inch joint depth.
c. Sub-caulk joints that are deep, or joints without suitable backstop, to proper depth.
d. Protect side walls of joint (to depth of caulking) with bond breaker tape. e. Install with adhesive on 2 faces in contact with sides of joints.

6. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
a. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. b. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
c. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C1193, unless otherwise indicated.
d. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C1193.

F. Cleaning

1. Clean off excess sealants and sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

2. Leave finished work in a neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers onto adjacent surfaces.

G. Protection

1. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion.

2. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 0536-1 SECTION 27 0536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section
B. Related Work Under Other Sections:

1. Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications

2. Section 27 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

3. Section 27 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems

4. Section 27 05 33 – Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems

5. Section 27 05 39 – Surface Raceways for Communications Systems

6. Section 27 05 48 – Noise and Vibration Controls for Communications Systems

7. Section 27 05 53 – Identification for Communications Systems

8. Section 27 10 00 – Structured Cabling, Basic Materials and Methods

9. Section 27 13 00 – Communications Interior Backbone Cabling

10. Section 27 14 00 – Communications Outside Plant Backbone Cabling

11. Section 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes

1. Cable Trays

2. Cable Runways

3. Basket Tray
B. Cable Tray Support

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Usage: In accordance with Division 1.

B. Conform with the applicable portions of the following industry guidelines

1. ASTM International
a. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 0536-2 a. NEMA FG 1 1-1998 Fiberglass Cable Tray Systems
b. NEMA VE 1 1-1998 Metal Cable Tray Systems.
c. NEMA VE 2 2001 Metal Cable Tray Installation Guidelines

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. NFPA 70B Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification, Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications and the following:

1. Deliver cable tray systems and components carefully to avoid breakage, denting and scoring finishes. Do not install damaged equipment.

2. Store cable trays and accessories in original cartons and in clean dry space; protect from weather and construction traffic. Wet materials should be unpacked and dried before storage. Replace any materials damaged by moisture exposure at no cost to the City.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Not Used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLE TRAY, CABLE RUNWAY AND BASKET TRAY
A. Cable Tray

1. Drawing and spec reference: CTxx-yy, where "xx" denotes nominal width of cable runway in inches and “yy” denotes nominal depth.

2. Construction:
a. Two longitudinal steel or aluminum members (side rails) with transverse members (rungs) mechanically fastened to the side rails.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 0536-3 b. Rungs 9" on center, unless otherwise noted and shall be capable of easy removal, reinstallation, or replacement if necessary.
c. Rung spacing in radiused fittings shall be 9” o.c. as measured at the center of the tray’s width.
d. UL Classified splice kits.
e. Accessories. Provide with a complete system of accessories, including radiused corners at vertical and horizontal bends, section splice plates, expansion plates, blind-end plates, etc. Provide waterfall drop-outs at each end of cabling racks and cabinets indicated on the plans scheduled or indicated to terminate open wiring systems.

3. Approvals:
a. ASTM A513
b. National Electrical Code, Article 318
c. NEMA VE1 Class 12C minimum, or to suit indicated cable and raceway loads, whichever is greater.

4. Manufacturers:
a. B-Line Redi-Rail Ladder Type Cable Tray with a complete system of accessories, including Ladder Drop-outs
b. Globe Tray
c. PW Industries
d. or equal.

B. Cable Runway

1. Drawing and spec reference: CR*, where "*" denotes nominal width of cable runway in inches.

2. Construction:
a. Solid Steel Side Bar per ASTM A-36 or Tubular Steel Side Bar per ASTM A-513.
b. 1.5" x 0.375 minimum tubular side stringers.
c. UL Classified splice kits.
d. Designed to support at least 100 pounds per foot load with a Safe Working Load deflection of ½” or less.

3. Finish: Telco gray powder coat or gold on zinc plating.

4. Approvals:
a. ASTM A513
b. UL Classified as an equipment grounding conductor.
c. National Electrical Code, Article 318

5. Manufacturers:
a. B-Line Telecom-Saunders SB-17.

C. Cable Tray, Open Wire Frame

1. Drawing and spec reference(s): CTWxx-y, where xx denotes the tray width and y the depth of the tray, in inches.

2. Construction
a. Welded wire mesh with continuous safety edge wire lip. b. Mesh forms grid at nominally 2" by 4"
c. Carbon Steel
d. Electroplated zinc galvanized
e. All bends, seams and joints field fabricated from basic straight section pieces and splice components as supplied by the manufacturer. f. Where supported from ceiling, supported at both sides in trapeze arrangement – centerline support not acceptable.
g. Provide a complete system of accessories, including bonding and grounding connections, conduit connectors, to terminate conduits extended to basket edge, radius shields to protect cabling at inside corners, and waterfall drop-outs at each end of cabling racks and cabinets indicated on the plans scheduled or indicated to terminate open wiring systems.
h. Provides pathway complying with ANSI/TIA-569C and NEMA Publications VE1 & VE2
i. Meets requirements of National Electrical Code, Article 318

3. Approvals:
a. NEMA Publications VE1 & VE2

4. Manufacturers:
a. B-Line Wire Basket Runway
b. Cablofil
c. G.S. Metals Corp
d. PW Industries
e. or equal.

D. Cable Tray, Fiberglass

1. Drawing and spec reference(s): CTFxx-y, where xx denotes the tray width and y the depth of the tray, in inches.

2. Construction
a. Non-metallic, Non-conductive, Fiberglass Construction, suitable for continuous exterior exposure in a marine environment.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 0536-5 b. Deep structural C-form side channels
c. Ladder rungs at 9" o.c., u.o.n
d. All bends, seams and joints field fabricated from basic straight section pieces and splice components as supplied by the manufacturer.

3. Approvals:
a. UL Listed as a system
b. ASTM A568
c. NEMA Publication FG1
d. NEMA 12C
e. National Electrical Code, Article 318.3
f. Meets ASTM E-84 smoke density rating; Polyester 680, Vinyl Ester 1025
g. Class 1 Flame Rating and self-extinguishing requirements of ASTM D- 635.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Enduro Composite Systems.
b. Robroy
c. P-W Industries
d. or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CABLE TRAY APPLICATION
A. Unless otherwise noted, communications cable tray installations shall conform to the following:

1. Type CT - Within Communications Rooms (including BDF and IDF spaces)

2. Type CTW - Horizontal station cabling outside of the communications rooms where shown on plans or where more than 100 cables are supported, whichever is greater.

3. Type CR – Wherever vertical transitions from ceiling or floor sleeves are required within the Communications Rooms.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide all required supports, fittings and accessories for a complete system as described in NEMA VE-2, by Code, manufacturer recommendation or as shown on the plans, whichever is most restrictive.

1. Cable Tray. Provide with a complete system of accessories, including UL Classified splice kits, radiused corners at vertical and horizontal bends, section splice plates, expansion plates, blind-end plates, etc. Provide waterfall drop-outs at each end of cabling racks and cabinets indicated on the plans scheduled or indicated to terminate open wiring systems.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 0536-6 a. Adjust rail position to align at dropout points and as directed by the City’s Representative to coordinate with the installation of theCity’s materials and/or the work of other Projects.

2. Basket Tray

3. For wire basket tray, provide a complete system of accessories, including bonding and grounding connections, conduit connectors, to terminate conduits extended to basket edge, radius shields to protect cabling at inside corners, and waterfall drop-outs at each end of cabling racks and cabinets indicated on the plans scheduled or indicated to terminate open wiring systems.

B. Bond sections to one another and to building ground.

C. Access Clearance. Maintain access for use by City's personnel to tray as described below. Coordinate installation with work of structural, mechanical, plumbing/fire protection and electrical trades to maintain required access.

1. Unless shown otherwise on the plans, provide a clear access of at least 24" wide along one side of each tray for use by City's personnel.

2. Unless shown otherwise on the plans, installation to maintain at least 12" vertical clearance over the top of each tray for use by City's personnel.

3.3 SUPPORT
A. Support in accordance with the most restrictive of the following:

1. California Building Code.

2. Contractor’s engineered means of engineered support submitted in accordance with the requirements of 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications and Section 27 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems.

3. Metallic Cable Tray: NEMA VE 2-2001, or latest edition

4. Fiberglass Cable Tray: NEMA FG-1-1998, or latest edition.

B. Provide lateral sway bracing as required by Code.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR SECTION 27 0543-1

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 0543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS.

A. Section 31 23 33 - Trenching and Backfilling

1.3 SUMMARY
A. Provide all labor, materials, transportation and equipment to complete the furnishing, installation, assembly, and set up of the Communications System Raceway, Conduit and Backbone work indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Notwithstanding any detailed information in this Section, provide complete, contiguous working raceway systems.

B. Communications Outside Plant Ductwork - refer to the drawings for demarcation of the work of this Project.

1. Communications Outside Plant Ductwork.

2. Communications Manholes

3. Communications Pullboxes and Vaults

4. Connection of underground ductbanks to ductbank placed by Others,

5. Connection of underground ductbanks to buildings and new and existing manholes

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. California Electric Code

1.5 REFERENCES
A. Per Division 1 and the following:

1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) a. AASHTO M-306 Standard Specification For Drainage, Sewer, Utility, And Related Castings

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
a. ANSI C80.1 1990 Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated
b. ANSI /SCTE 77 2007 Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity

3. BICSI
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR SECTION 27 0543-2

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
a. 2004 Customer Owned Outside Plant Design Manual

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a. NEMA 250-2003 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
b. ANSI/NEMA FB 1-2003 Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable
c. FB 2.10 2000 Selection and Installation Guidelines For Fittings For Use With Non-Flexible Metallic Conduit Or Tubing (Rigid Metal Conduit, Intermediate Metal Conduit, And Electrical Metallic Tubing). d. FB 2.20 2000 Selection and Installation Guidelines for Fittings for use with Flexible Electrical Conduit and Cable
e. NEMA FG 1 1-1998 Fiberglass Cable Tray Systems
f. NEMA ICS 6 2001 Industrial Controls and Systems Enclosures g. NEMA RN 1 1998 Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. h. NEMA TC 2 2003 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit i. NEMA TC 3 1999 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
j. NEMA TC 6&8 2003 PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installations
k. NEMA TC 7 2000 Smooth Wall Coilable Polyethylene Electrical Plastic Duct
l. NEMA TC 9 1999 Fittings for ABS and PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Application
m. NEMA TC 14 1984(R 1997) Filament-Wound Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings
n. NEMA TC 19 2001 Nonmetallic Riser U-Type Guards
o. NEMA VE 1 1-1998 Metallic Cable Tray Systems.
p. NEMA VE 2 2001 Cable Tray Installation Guidelines

5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
a. UL 6 2004 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel
b. UL 360 1986 (R 2003) Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit c. UL 514A 1991 (R 2004) Metallic Outlet Boxes
d. UL 514B 1989 (R 2004) Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings e. UL 514C 1988 (R 1996) Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers.
f. UL 651 1989 (R 1995) Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR SECTION 27 0543-3

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

1.6 SUBMITALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

B. Duct

1. Ducts shall be stored to avoid warping and deterioration with ends sufficiently plugged to prevent entry of any water or solid substances.

2. Plastic ducts shall be stored on a flat surface and protected from the direct rays of the sun.

C. WARRANTY

1. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTBANK CONSTRUCTION
A. PVC Conduit

1. Drawing and Spec Reference: PVC.

2. Construction:
a. 4" trade diameter, unless otherwise noted.
b. Poly-vinyl chloride.
c. Schedule by Application
1) Straight segments, Schedule 40.
2) Flat elbows, Schedule 40.
3) Vertical elbows sweep up to grade, Schedule 80.
4) Above grade, Schedule 80.
d. Elbows.
1) Where innerduct liner is scheduled – CRSC.
2) Elsewhere, Schedule 80.
3) 90° C rated.
4) Solvent welded joints, joints by pipe manufacturer.
e. Application.
1) Soil Backfill/Direct Burial
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR SECTION 27 0543-4

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
a) RUS Type II, Type C or Type DB
b) Schedule 40.
2) Concrete Encasement:
a) PVC Type DB-120,
b) RUS Type I, Type B or Type EB
c) Any meeting Soil Backfill/Direct Burial.
3) Boring
a) HDPE.
b) RUS Type Flexible Plastic.
f. Performance:
1) Tensile Strength: 7,000 psi at 73.4° F.
2) Flexural Strength: 11,000 psi.
3) Compressive Strength: 8,600 psi.
g. Approvals:
1) RUS Listed for Telephone Cable Installation 5-99 Edition, or latest release thereof.
2) NEMA TC-2, PVC Type EPC-40 and EPC-80.
3) NEMA TC-3.
4) NEMA TC14 Fiberglass Conduit.
5) UL 514 fittings.
6) UL 651.
7) ANSI C33.91.
h. Manufacturers:
1) RUS Listed:

Manufacturer RUS Listed for Manufacturer Part Number
Allwire, Inc. Flexible plastic ALLDUCT
American Pipe &
Plastics
Plastic Type B, C, and D
Plastic Type EB and DB
Plastic PVC Multi-Duct (2,3,4 and 6-
way)
Americon
International
Flexible plastic HDPE Duct
Plastic PVC Type C
Apache Plastics, Inc. Plastic Type EB and Type DB
ARMCO Plastic Smooth-Cor Type B and Type C
Arnco Flexible plastic HDPE Conduit
Bay Plastics, Inc. Plastic Type B and Type C
Bristolpipe Plastic Type B, C, and D
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR SECTION 27 0543-5

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Can-Tex Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Plastic Type B, C, and D
Carlon Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Plastic Type B, C, and D
Plastic Multi-Gard
Certain-Teed
Products Corp.

Plastic Type EB and Type DB
CIBA-GEIGY Fiberglass T & D Conduit
Condux
International, Inc.

Concrete Condux
Plastic Type EB and Type DB
CSR Polypipe Flexible plastic HDPE Duct
Dura-line Flexible plastic HDPE Duct
Eagle Pacific
Industries, Inc.

Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Flexible plastic HDPE Coiled Duct
Endot Industries Flexible plastic HDPE Duct
Freedom Plastics,
Inc.

Plastic Type C
Hercules, Inc. Flexible plastic Corflo plastic conduit
Hurlbut Plastic Pipe Plastic Type C
Ingomar Plastic Pipe Plastic Type B and Type C
J-M Manufacturing
Company
Plastic Types C, EB, and DB
Kyova Plastic Type EB and Type DB
LCP National
Plastics, Inc.

Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Plastic Type B and Type C
Northern Pipe
Products
Plastic Type B, C, and D
OMNI Flexible plastic HDPE Duct
Petroflex Flexible plastic HDPE Duct
Flexible plastic Corrugated HDPE Duct
Phillips Products
Co., Inc.

Flexible plastic Driscon 3200
Phone Ducs Plastic Multiple plastic conduit (4, 6, &
9 Way)
PLEXCO Flexible plastic PLEXCO Duct
PWPipe Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Pyramid
Industries, Inc.

Plastic Type EB and Type DM
Flexible
plastic
HDPE Conduit
Quail Plastics Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Queen City
Plastics
Plastic Type EB and Type DB
River City
Plastics
Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR SECTION 27 0543-6

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Sedco Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Southern Pipe,
Inc.

Plastic PVC Types EB, DB, and Sch. 40
Tamaqua Cable
Products
Flexible
plastic
HDPE Duct
Tridyn Industries Plastic Type EB and Type DB
Vassallo
Industries
Plastic Type B and Type C
Wesflex Flexible
plastic
Flex-Con
2) or equal
B. Fiberglass Conduit

1. Drawing Reference: Fiberglass

2. Construction:
a. Trade Standard Sizes
b. Meets NEMA TC 14
c. Complete system of joints and threaded steel conduit couplers

3. Manufacturers:
a. TVC Communication/Vikimatic Fiberglass Conduit
b. Champion Fiberglass
c. FRE Composite
d. or equal.

2.2 FITTINGS
A. Couplings, adapters, transition fittings, etc., shall be molded PVC, slip on, solvent weld type conforming to NEMA TC3 for Schedule 40 or 80 and NEMA TC 9 for type EB or DB.

B. Fitting Types

1. Expansion Fittings, 12”, Metallic:

2. Function: At road or bridge expansion joints requiring up to 12” of expansion compensation.

3. Construction
a. Steel, hot dip galvanized.
b. Nylon wear bushings
c. O-ring seal
d. Bonding jumper
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR SECTION 27 0543-7

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

4. Manufacturers:
a. O-Z Gedney Type AX, Type AX-8, and Type EX fittings with Type BJ Bonding Jumper.
b. TVC/Vikimatic VB0285X series.
c. Or Equal.

C. Expansion Fittings, 6”, Non-metallic:

1. Function: At road or bridge expansion joints requiring up to 6” of expansion compensation.

2. Construction
a. Fiberglass
b. Provide bonding jumper.

3. Manufacturers:
a. TVC Communications HW or Extra Heavy Wall Expansion Joint. b. Vikimatic
c. FRE Composites, Inc.
d. Or Equal.

D. Caps, Underground Conduit Stubs

1. Provide at each location indicated for future expansion.

2. Wateright.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Carlon E985N
b. Vikimatic
c. or equal by manufacturers listed in this Section for underground ductbank construction.

2.3 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
A. Vaults, PullBoxes and Manholes, Precast, General

1. Precast units shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of precast concrete products, including precast manholes, boxes and handholes.

2. Construction
a. General
1) Castings shall be free from warp and blow holes that may impair strength or appearance.

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
2) Structures shall be precast to the design and details indicated, precast monolithically and placed as a unit, or structures may be assembled in sections, designed and produced by the
manufacturer in accordance with the requirements specified. 3) Structures shall be identified with the manufacturer's name embedded in or otherwise permanently attached to an interior wall face.
4) Structure top and wall shall be of a uniform thickness of not less than 4 inches except at knockouts.
5) The minimum concrete cover for reinforcing steel shall be 2 inches.
6) All steel, except reinforcing steel, shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
7) Knockouts & Windows
a) Thin-walled knock-out panels designed for future duct bank entrances are permitted.
b) Sides of precast windows shall be a minimum of 4
inches from the inside surface of adjacent walls, floors, or ceilings.
c) Form of the perimeter of precast window openings to
have a keyed or inward flared surface to provide a
positive interlock with the mating duct bank envelope.
d) Provide welded wire-fabric reinforcing through window openings for in-field cutting and flaring into duct bank envelopes.
e) Provide additional reinforcing steel comprised of at least 2 No. 4 bars around window openings.
8) Extension Rings
a) Provide extension rings as-required to extend from
finished grade to communications utilities.
9) Bottom and Drain Sumps
a) Provide solid concrete bottom surface.
b) Provide drain sumps for precast structures a minimum of 12 inches in diameter and 4 inches deep.

3. Joints:
a. Provide tongue-and-groove or shiplap joints on mating edges of precast components.
b. Design joints to firmly interlock adjoining components and to provide waterproof junctions, and adequate shear transfer.
c. Seal joints watertight using preformed plastic strip conforming to AASHTO M198, Type B.

4. Frames and Covers
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR SECTION 27 0543-9

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
a. Covers to match across all utilities.
b. Provide fiber composite lids at pedestrian rated covers, H-20 steel slip resistant covers otherwise.
c. Labeling
1) Provide labeling as follows:
a) “Communications”
b) City's Manhole or Vault No, as shown on drawings or
provided to Contractor prior to vault order placement.
2) Labeling shall be:
a) Cast in concrete lids
b) Written in weld on steel lids
c) Alternatively, for pedestrian grade vault lids and for the vault number only, provide ½” tall, 1/8” min. thickness lamacoid label, rivet attached to box top in recess area below surface of lid.

5. Pulling-In-Irons
a. Steel bars bent in the form indicated and cast in the walls and floors. b. Install a pulling-in iron in the wall opposite each duct line entrance at walls, not less than 6 inches above or below, and opposite the ducts entering the manhole.
c. Pulling-in irons shall project into the manhole approximately 4 inches, or be cast in a pocket. Iron shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication.

6. Cable Racks and Arms
a. Provide nonmetallic cable racks:
1) Vaults and pullboxes. Minimum two (2), at each vault face 24 inches or longer, at least one (1) each face otherwise. 2) Manholes. Provide AT&T standard arrangement of cable racks at each manhole, except using nonmetallic cable rack hardware. a) Provide non-metallic cable rack arms. Provide two
nonmetallic cable racks arms - minimum 12” arms – for
each cable rack provided at each manhole or vault as
required above.

B. Underground Pull Boxes and Vaults, Concrete with Diamond Plate Steel or Concrete Lids

1. Drawing and Specification References:
a. PB1P
b. PB1T
c. PB2P
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR SECTION 27 0543-10

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
d. PB2T
e. PB3T

2. Minimum Size
a. As scheduled on the drawings. Provide scheduled or larger size. b. Provide extension rings as required to meet required depth.

3. Minimum Load Performance:
a. PB*P – where * is the vault size: Manufactuer’s Parkway/Pedestrian Box/Lid or using Polymer Concrete Box lid meeting ANSI/SCTE 77- 2007 Tier 8.
b. PB*T – where * is the vault size: Per AASHTO H-22. See options described in plans and Part 3 for Contractors Option to use Polymer Concrete Vaults at specific dirt road/path conditions where indicated on the plans. Refer below for specification of Polymer Concrete Vaults.

4. Lid Construction:
a. As scheduled on the plans and in the schedule of applications in Part 3. b. Labeling "Communications" in addition to the vault number identified by the City’s Representative.

5. Solid Bottom, with sump as indicated on the plans.

6. Sidewall Duct Entries with bell end fittings.

7. Cover Components
a. PB1 and PB2 Size: One piece construction
b. PB3 Size: Two piece hinged lids with torsion spring lifters.

8. Manufacturers:
a. Oldcastle Precast
b. Brooks Products
1) 1P & 1T: 5 Series and extension rings as required
2) 2P & 2T: 67 Series and extension rings as required
3) 3T: 400 Series with 11C Type Lid.
c. Jensen PreCast
1) PB1P: P9 with FL9D lid, P9BA base and extension rings as required.
2) PB1T P9 with P9-61 lid, P9BA base and extension rings as required
3) PB2P: P36 with FL36D cover, P36BA base and extension rings as required
4) PB2T: P36 with P36-61D lid, P36BA base and extension rings as required
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR SECTION 27 0543-11

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
5) PB3T: 35TA
d. Utility Vault Company, Inc./Oldcastle Precast
1) PB3T: PTS-3660, with H-20-44 loading cover, with 3660-06 and 3660-12 extensions as required.
e. Associated Concrete Products
f. Forni Corporation.
g. Or equal.

C. Underground Pull Boxes and Vaults, Polymer Concrete

1. Drawing and Specification References – where the option to use of composite vault assemblies is indicated on the plans and per Part 3 of these specifications a. PB1P
b. PB1T
c. PB2P
d. PB2T
e. PB3T

2. Minimum Size
a. As scheduled on the drawings. Provide scheduled or larger size.

3. Cover Components
a. PB1 and PB2 Size: One piece construction
b. PB3 Size: Two piece hinged lids with torsion spring lifters.

4. Construction:
a. Polymer concrete cover and body.

5. Labeling
a. Labeling "Communications" in addition to the vault number identified by the City’s Representative.

6. Sidewall Duct Entries with bell end fittings.

7. Solid bottom with sump as indicated on the plans.

8. Minimum Load Performance:
a. PB*P – where * is the vault size: ANSI/SCTE 77-2007 Tier 8. b. PB*T – where * is the vault size: ANSI/SCTE 77-2007 Tier 22.

9. Manufacturers
a. Armorcast Polymer Concrete Vaults
b. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions H-Series
c. New Basis
d. Quazite
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR SECTION 27 0543-12

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
e. Hubbell Power Systems
f. Or equal.

D. Manhole/Maintenance Hole

1. Drawing and Specification Reference:
a. MH: Maintenance Hole, 4 feet 6 inches by 8 feet 6 inches inside.

2. Construction:
a. AT&T Reference Specification PTS-65 for overall size and shape. 1) Arrange duct bank entry per latest BICSI outside plant manual, not AT&T/SBC/Pacific Bell standard
2) Provide non-metallic racking and cable support arms, not AT&T standard metallic arms.
3) Increase wall thickness where indicated installation depth exceeds rating of PTS-65 assembly.
b. Ladder
1) Provide 1 ladder per maintenance hold
2) Steel, hooks to rungs at top of maintenance hold neck, long enough to reach bottom of maintenance hole.

3. Manufacturers
a. OldCastle/Utility Vault Company, Inc. 38-PTS-65, with cover with nameplate "Communications", with 3606 and 3612 extensions as required, with ladder.
b. Teichert Precast Products
c. Jensen PreCast PTS-65
d. Associated Concrete Products
e. Forni Corporation.
f. Or equal.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS UNDERGROUND PRODUCTS
A. Cable Warning Tape

1. Provide
a. 6 inches wide minimum.
b. 5 mil plastic.
c. Metallic backing at least 10 feet o.c.
d. 1 mil metallic foil core.
e. Orange in color
f. Suitable for buried applications.

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
g. Continuously imprinted with the words "WARNING -
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE BELOW" or similar at not more than 48 inch intervals.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Carlon Telecom Systems.
b. Monarch Duct &Conduit
c. Vikimatic
d. Or equal.

B. Pull Rope

1. At least 3/8 inch diameter polyethylene or 3/8” min width woven aramid fiber pulltape.

2. 200 pound minimum strength.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Arnco Dandy-Line
b. Carlon Telecom Systems.
c. Fibertek Pull-line
d. Monarch Duct & Conduit
e. Vikimatic
f. Any length marked tape listed elsewhere herein below constructed as a pulltape.
g. Or equal.

C. Length Marked Tape

1. Provide 1/2 inch flat tape with sequential markings in whole feet.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Carlon Telecom Systems.
b. Greenlee
c. Fibertek Pulltape or Tracertape
d. Vikimatic
e. Or equal.

D. Conduit Plugs

1. Provide universal blank duct plug type, with eye for tying rope and tape.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Carlon Telecom Systems Universal Blank Duct Plugs, Simplex, Triplex and Quadplex Duct Plugs
b. Condux International, Inc.

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
c. Monarch Duct & Conduit Duct Plugs and Multistep Cap Ends d. GS Industries of Bassett, LLC Expandable Watertight Plugs e. Or equal.

E. Line Marker Post

1. Orange polyethylene, post height 4 feet above surface.

2. Soil anchor.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Carlon Telecom Systems.
b. Vikimatic
c. Or equal.

F. Conduit Spacer, Trench

1. Construction
a. Non-metallic.
b. Sized to snap around conduits as shown on Drawings.
c. Interlocking.

2. Manufacturers:
a. Underground Devices Wunpeece.
b. GS Industries of Bassett, LLC Underground Products Spacer System. c. Armorcast Products Company
d. Carlon Snap-Loc Spacers
e. or equal
G. Pulling In Irons

1. 7/8" Diameter
a. 6" exposed length minimum after embedment
b. RUS approved

2. Manufacturer
a. Cooper Power Systems
b. Or equal by listed vault or maintenance hole manufacturer c. Or equal.

H. Cable Racks & Supports

1. Construction:
a. 12" minimum rack arms
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR SECTION 27 0543-15

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
b. Snap into vertical strut sections provided with new manhole, pullboxes and vaults, or into City’s existing vaults, where indicated.

2. Approvals
a. RUS
b. NEMA

3. Manufacturers:
a. Oldcastle
b. Underground Devices
c. or equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the most restrictive of the Code, the manufacturer's instructions, these specifications and the relevant CalTrans, NEMA or RUS guidelines and conform.

3.2 CONDUIT APPLICATION
A. General: Install the following types of conduits and fittings in the locations listed, unless otherwise noted in the drawings:

1. Underground Ductbanks, Concrete Encased
a. PVC
B. Exterior, Exposed:

1. Type RSC for applications up to 8 feet AFF or to first pull box, whichever is first, applications subject to physical abuse or for applications greater than 4" diameter.

2. EMT acceptable in all other applications not noted above up to 4", where used in conjunction with specified Raintight (compression) couplers.

C. Embedded in Concrete

1. RSC or rigid non-metallic conduit.

2. PVC
D. In Utility Tunnels

1. RSC

2. CRSC

3. IMC

3.3 UNERGROUND VAULT APPLICATION
Condition Acceptable vault construction standard
AASHTO H-20 ANSI /SCTE 77 Pedestrian/Parkway ANSI
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR SECTION 27 0543-16

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
2007 Tier 22 /SCTE 77 2007 Tier 8
Pedestrian pathways. Yes Yes Yes
At unpaved roads
subject to infrequent
vehicle traffic.

Yes Yes No
At paved roads and at
paved surfaces
ordinarily exposed to
motor vehicle traffic.

Yes No No

3.4 UNDERGROUND CONSTRUCTION:

A. Duct and Conduit Placement.

1. Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downward toward underground structures and away from buildings with a minimum pitch of 3 inches in 100 feet.

2. Depending on the contour of the finished grade, the high-point may be at a terminal, a manhole, a handhole, or between manholes or handholes.

3. Excavate trenches along straight lines from structure to structure before ducts are laid or structure constructed so the elevation can be adjusted, if necessary, to avoid unseen obstruction.

4. Except at conduit risers, accomplish changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either vertical or horizontal, by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature of 25 feet. Sweep bends may be made up of one or more curved or straight sections or combinations thereof. Manufactured bends shall have a minimum radius of 18 inches for use with ducts of less than 3 inches in diameter and a minimum radius of 36 inches for ducts of 3 inches in diameter and larger.

5. Short-radius manufactured 90-degree duct bends may be used only for building, pole or equipment risers, unless specifically indicated as acceptable. The minimum manufactured bend radius shall be 450 mm 18 inches for ducts of less than 80 mm 3 inch diameter, and 900 mm 36 inches for ducts 80 mm 3 inches or greater in diameter. Otherwise, long sweep bends having a minimum radius of

7.6 m 25 feet shall be used for a change of direction of more than 5 degrees, either horizontally or vertically. Both curved and straight sections may be used to form long sweep bends, but the maximum curve used shall be 30 degrees and manufactured bends shall be used.

B. Duct Bank.

1. Duct Entrance Arrangement - Conform to Table 3.33 and applicable arrangement diagrams 3.67-3.74 of 2004 BISCI Customer Owned Outside Plant Design Manual.

2. Terminate ducts in end-bells where duct lines enter underground structures.

3. Stagger duct joints by rows and layers to strengthen the duct bank.

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

4. Provide plastic duct spacers that interlock vertically and horizontally. Spacer assembly shall consist of base spacers, intermediate spacers and top spacers to provide a completely enclosed and locked-in duct bank. Install spacers per manufacturer's instructions, but provide a minimum of two spacer assemblies per 10 feet of duct bank. Before pouring concrete or backfilling, as applies, anchor duct bank assemblies to prevent the assemblies from floating. Anchoring shall be done by driving reinforcing rods adjacent to every other duct spacer assembly and attaching the rod to the spacer assembly.

5. Partially Completed Duct Banks. Ducts shall be kept clean of concrete, dirt, or foreign substances during construction. During construction wherever a construction joint is necessary in a duct bank, prevent debris such as mud, sand and dirt from entering ducts by providing suitable duct plugs. Fit concrete envelope of a partially completed duct bank with reinforcing steel extending a minimum of 2 feet back into the envelope and a minimum of 2 feet beyond the end of the envelope. Provide one No. 4 bar in each corner, 3 inches from the edge of the envelope. Secure corner bars with two No. 3 ties, spaced approximately 1 foot apart. Restrain reinforcing assembly from moving during concrete pouring.

6. As each section of a duct line is completed from structure to structure, for duct sizes 3 inches and larger draw a flexible testing mandrel approximately 12 inches long with a diameter less than the diameter of the duct through a duct. After which, draw a stiff bristle brush having the same diameter of the duct through the duct, until duct is clear of particles of earth, sand, and gravel; then immediately install end plugs. For duct sizes less than 3 inches, draw a stiff bristle brush through the duct, until duct is clear of particles of earth, sand, and gravel; then immediately install end plugs.

7. Field cuts requiring tapers shall be made with proper tools and match factory tapers.

8. Joints shall be staggered at least 6 inches vertically. Plastic Duct joints shall be made by brushing a plastic solvent cement on insides of plastic coupling fittings and on outsides of duct ends. Each duct and fitting shall then be slipped together with a quick 1/4-turn twist to set the joint tightly.

9. A coupling recommended by the duct manufacturer shall be used whenever an existing duct is connected to a duct of different material or shape.

10. Unless otherwise noted, exterior communications duct runs shall be buried a minimum of 30" below finished grade or as required to conform to local utility requirements, whichever is greater.

11. Refer to the details in the plans for additional depth required for PDS communications duct construction.

12. Where new trenching is required, backfill and compaction requirements shall be as defined Division 33.

13. Ducts shall be provided with end bells whenever duct lines terminate in manholes or handholes.

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

14. Provide concrete encasement of all communications duct runs. Construct underground duct lines of individual ducts encased in concrete. Do not mix different kinds of duct in any one duct bank. Ducts shall not be smaller than shown. The concrete encasement surrounding the bank shall be rectangular in cross-section and shall provide at least 3 inches of concrete cover for ducts.

Separate conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of 2 inches, except separate light and power conduits from communications ducts by a minimum concrete thickness of 4 inches. The top of the concrete encasement shall not be less than 18 inches below grade except that under roads and pavement concrete be a minimum of 24 inches below grade.
a. Duct line encasements shall be monolithic construction. Where a connection is made to a previously poured encasement, the new encasement shall be well bonded or doweled to the existing encasement.

Submit proposed bonding method for approval in accordance with the detail drawing portion of the submittals.

C. Where duct runs under existing roads, cut and patch the pavement as indicated on the Civil Plans.

D. Conduit Plugs and Pull Rope. New conduit indicated as being unused or empty shall be provided with plugs on each end. Plugs shall contain a weephole or screen to allow water drainage. Provide a 3/8 inch nylon pull rope having 3 feet of slack at each end of unused or empty conduits.

E. Manhole Placement and Connections

1. In unpaved areas, the top of new manhole covers shall be approximately 1/2 inch above the finished grade.

2. Where existing grades that are higher than finished grades are encountered, concrete assemblies designed for the purpose shall be installed to elevate temporarily the manhole cover to existing grade level.

3. All duct lines entering manholes must be installed on compact soil or otherwise supported when entering a manhole to prevent shear stress on the duct at the point of entrance to the manhole.

4. Duct lines entering precast concrete manholes through a precast knockout penetration shall be grouted tight with a portland cement mortar. PVC duct lines entering precast manholes through a PVC endbell shall be solvent welded to the endbell.

5. A cast metal grille-type sump frame and cover shall be installed over the manhole sump.

6. Connections to Existing Manholes. For duct line connections to existing structures, break the structure wall out to the dimensions required and preserve steel in the structure wall. Cut steel and bend out to tie into the reinforcing of the duct line encasement. Chip out the structure wall to form a key for the duct line encasement. Grout new bell end entries watertight to the formed opening.

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
F. Mark locations of future provision underground raceways by pre-cast reinforced concrete pullbox set flush in ground with stamped brass disk identification plate tied to conduit end with “Ty-Wrap”, “Quick-Wrap” or equal.

G. In existing facilities underground construction, the Contractor shall promptly repair any indicated utility lines or systems damaged by Contractor operations. Damage to lines or systems not indicated, which are caused by Contractor operations, shall be brought to the immediate attention of the City’s Representative. If the Contractor is advised in writing of the location of a non-indicated line or system, such notice shall provide that portion of the line or system with "indicated" status in determining liability for damages. In any event, the Contractor shall immediately notify the City’s Representativeof any such damage.

H. At twelve inches below grade, place specified warning tape continuously.

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR SECTION 27 0548-1

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 0548 - NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes provisions of:

1. Flexible communications raceway connections to vibrating machinery

2. Sealing of communications device boxes and related installed in sound rated walls. Refer to the architectural plans and wall schedules - any walls identified with an STC rating are sound rated.

3. Coordination of airtight installation requirements where Communications Systems Pathway penetrates Meeting Rooms, Mechanical, Electrical Room and other high noise areas of the project.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI/UL 1479-2003 Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM E814-02 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops.

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

1. UL Fire Resistance Directories

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.6 DELIVERY HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR SECTION 27 0548-2

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTIONS:

A. Make communications connections to vibrating equipment flexible as follows:

1. For conduit over 1" O.D. make communications connections to vibrating equipment via a flexible expansion/deflection conduit coupling sized as required.

Coupling shall have flexible and watertight outer jacket, internal grounding strap, plastic inner sleeve to maintain smooth wireway, and end hubs with threads to fit standard threaded metal conduit.

2. Manufacturers:
a. XD Xpansion Deflection Coupling by Cooper Crouse-Hinds of Syracuse, N.Y.
b. Type DX Expansion Deflection Fitting by O-Z Gedney
c. or equal.

3. For conduit under 1" O.D. utilize FLEX or LIQUIDTIGHT conduit as specified in Section 27 05 33 – Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems with slack at least 3' or 15 diameters long, whichever is the longer or provide a flexible coupling as defined above.

2.2 J-BOX MASTIC
A. At all electrical boxes, flush and semi-flush pull cans, media panel backboxes, device boxes and similar penetrating sound isolating partitions, utilize sheet form adhesive mastic to increase the mass of the enclosure through application to the entire concealed surface within the wall cavity.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Insul-Pad by Dottie Corp.

2. Duct-Seal by Gardner Bender, Inc.

3. Duxseal by Manville

4. Outlet Pad by Lowry

5. 3M Fire Barrier Moldable Putty Pads

6. or equal.

2.3 RESILIENT PENETRATIONS
A. For conduit:

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

1. Sleeves: Sleeves of appropriate gage galvanized sheet metal shall be formed to at least the thickness of the penetrated construction and 3/4" to 1" larger in each cross-sectional dimension than the penetrating element. a. Manufacturers:
1) Century-Line Sleeves by Thunderline Corporation
2) Custom by Contractor
3) or equal.

2. Batt: Glass fiber of batt or mineral wool, 1 to 3 lb./cu. ft. density. a. Manufacturers
1) Certain-Teed
2) Johns-Manville
3) Owens-Corning
4) or equal.

3. Acoustical Sealant:
a. Manufacturers
1) DAP
2) Pecora
3) Tremco
4) U.S. Gypsum
5) 3M
6) or equal.

4. Firestop Sealant:
a. Where required, resilient firestop caulking may be used in lieu of Acoustical Sealant when installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer's directions. Fully hardened firestop caulk shall develop a Shore A hardness of no greater than 35. Refer to the requirements of Section 27 05 33 – Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems.

B. For cable penetrations in non-fire rated, sound rated partitions.

1. Minimum Features, Function, Performance and Construction:
a. Zero Maintenance supports future moves, adds and changes. b. Rated Acoustical Performance in excess of STC 60
c. Low Smoke Leakage Ratings
d. Retrofittable – retrofit kit comes split apart for old work e. Pathways can be ganged for additional capacity
f. Pathway adjusts to accommodate wall and floor thicknesses between 4” (102 mm) & 8” (203 mm)
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR SECTION 27 0548-4

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
g. Construction:
1) Shell Composition: V-0 High Impact ABS/PC Thermoplastic 2) Seal & Curtain: Flame Retardant, Low-Smoke Silicone Rubber 3) Cable Loading Area: 6.7 in2 (43.2 cm2)
4) Allowable Cable Fill: 0 - 100%
5) Wall Area Required (ft2 / Device): .167 ft2
6) In-Service Temp.: -30ºF - 130ºF (-34ºC - 54ºC)

2. Manufacturers:
a. STI Ez-Path Series 33NEZ and 44NEZ Smoke & Acoustical Pathway. b. Hilti
c. Or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS, CONNECTION TO VIBRATING

EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall not install any vibrating equipment or conduit attached thereto which makes rigid contact with the "building" unless it is approved in this specification or by the City's Representative. "Building" includes, but is not limited to slabs, beams, columns, walls, partitions, ceilings, studs, ceiling framing and suspension systems.

B. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall bring to the City's Representative's attention any conflicts between trades which will result in unavoidable rigid contact at equipment, conduit, piping, ducts, etc., as described herein, due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible contractor's expense.

C. The Contractor shall obtain inspection and approval from the City's Representative of any installation to be covered or enclosed, prior to such closure.

3.2 INSPECTION OF CONDITIONS
A. Examine related Work and surfaces before starting Work of this Section. Report to the City's Representative, in writing, conditions which will prevent proper provision of this work. Beginning the Work of this Section without reporting unsuitable conditions to the City's Representative constitutes acceptance of such conditions by Contractor. Perform any required removal, repair, or replacement of this Work caused by unsuitable conditions at no additional cost to the City.

B. Coordination

1. Coordinate with the work of the Base Building Construction Contract.

Coordinate Work of this Section with all other impacted trades.

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

3.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS, FLEXIBLE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. The installation of flexible electrical connections to vibration isolated equipment shall in no way impair or restrain the function of the vibration isolation installed by the work by Others.

1. Using gross slack. Install flexible conduit in a grossly slack loop form or shallow "U" form. Install stranded conductors with sufficient slack to accommodate maximum possible movement.

2. Using flexible coupling. The flexible coupling shall be free and not in contact with any nearby building construction and shall be installed slack, and free of strain in any direction. Install stranded conductors as above

3.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS, J-BOX MASTIC
A. Application: All Communications Systems work in sound isolating assemblies, including but not limited to residential rooms, offices, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms and related to utilize backboxes for all services, including but not limited to low voltage communication. Installation of backboxes to conform with following:

1. Space outlet boxes on opposite faces of the wall by more than 24" o.c. Where daisy chainned conduits indicated on the plans, connect such boxes by slack flexible conduit (2 times longer than distance between outlets).

2. Cutouts for electrical boxes and penetrating piping/conduit shall be no more than 1/4" oversize.

3. Caulk gap between drywall and electrical boxes and/or piping/conduit airtight with Acoustical Sealant. Apply J-Box mastic to back of all penetrating electrical boxes and press firmly at joint to wallboard to provide an airtight seal.

3.5 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS, RESILIENT PENETRATIONS
A. Penetrations included in this Section of the Specifications include all communications conduit connected to vibrating equipment within 30 feet of such equipment B. Method for round or rectangular penetrations.

1. Cut a clean opening in the penetrated construction very nearly the size of the sleeve for each penetrating element. Provide lintels above, relief structure below and vertical framing between and to the sides, as required. Provide the above, escutcheon plates and such related construction as is necessary to make the penetrated structure as solid and massive near the penetrations as the surrounding construction.

2. Set the metal sleeve into the penetrated construction in an airtight manner around its outer periphery, using grout, dry packing, plaster or drywall compound full depth and all around - but only to a maximum width of ½" - or the requirements of the above paragraph shall not have been satisfied.

3. Pack annular opening with glass fiber between metal sleeve and penetrating element full depth, all around to a firm degree of compaction. Leave a ½" deep annular opening free at each end of the metal sleeve; fill this fully with sealant.

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

3.6 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ROOMS REQUIREMENTS
A. All mechanical and electrical rooms, plenums, duct shafts and drywall duct enclosures and other enclosures of high noise sources shall be constructed airtight. This means that every precaution shall be taken to maintain construction completely airtight around a room so designated. Construction joints, duct penetrations, electrical boxes, frames, supports, cabinets, doors, access panels, fixtures, etc., all shall be built or installed in such a manner as to prevent sound transmission through any construction enclosing a room horizontally or vertically. Appropriate lintels, frames, blocking, escutcheons, grouting, gaskets, packing, caulking, taping, filling, etc., all shall be employed to prevent sound transmission. Refer to requirements of this Section for Resilient Penetrations.

B. All work under this section is to comply with the above. Contractor to report to City's Representative any construction conditions which arise which might compromise compliance with this requirement.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 0553-1 SECTION 27 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Usage: In accordance with Division 1.

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM D 709(2001) Laminated Thermosetting Materials

2. Telecommunications Industry Association (ANSI/TIA)
a. ANSI/TIA-606-B (2012) Administration Standard Telecommunications Infrastructure

3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
a. UL 969 (1995; R 2001) Marking and Labeling Systems

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

B. Identification and administration work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of:

1. ANSI/TIA-606-B (2012) Administration Standard Telecommunications Infrastructure

2. ANSI/TIA-569C (2012) Telecommunications Pathway and Spaces

3. ANSI/TIA- 568-C (2009)Telecommunications Cabling Standard.

4. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual.

5. UL 969.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.7 SEQUENCING
A. Not Used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMUNICATION CABLING LABELS, INTERIOR
A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.

B. Shall be preprinted or computer printed type. Hand written labels are not acceptable.

C. Provide vinyl substrate with a white printing area and black print. If cable jacket is white, provide cable label with printing area that is any other color than white, preferably orange or yellow – so that the labels are easily distinguishable.

D. Shall be flexible vinyl or other substrates to apply easy and flex as cables are bent.

E. Shall use aggressive adhesives that stay attached even to the most difficult to adhere to jacketing.

F. Manufacturers:

1. Cable Type – Silver Satin
a. Brady TLS2200 labels – PTL-31-427, PTL-32-427
b. Brady Laser tab labels – LAT-18-361, LAT-53-361
c. Hubbell
d. Leviton
e. Panduit.
f. or equal.

2. Cable Type – 4 pair UTP
a. Brady TLS2200 labels – PTL-31-427,PTL-32-427
b. Brady Laser tab labels – LAT-18-361, LAT-53-361
c. Hubbell
d. Leviton
e. Panduit.
f. or equal.

3. Cable Type – 4 pair STP
a. Brady TLS2200 labels – PTL-21-427
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 0553-3 b. Brady Laser tab labels – LAT-19-361
c. Hubbell
d. Leviton
e. Panduit.
f. or equal.

4. Cable Type – 25 pair copper
a. Brady TLS2200 labels – PTL-21-427
b. Brady Laser tab labels – LAT-19-361
c. Panduit.
d. or equal.

5. Cable Type – 50 pair copper
a. Brady TLS2200 labels – PTL-33-427
b. Panduit.
c. or equal.

6. Cable Type – 100 pair copper
a. Brady TLS2200 labels – PTL-34-427
b. Brady
c. Panduit.
d. or equal.

7. Cable Type – 2 strand fiber
a. Brady TLS2200 labels – PTL-19-427
b. Brady Laser tab labels– LAT-17-361
c. Panduit.
d. or equal.

8. Cable Type – 4-12 strand fiber
a. Brady TLS2200 labels – PTL-21-427
b. Brady Laser tab labels – LAT-19-361
c. Panduit.
d. or equal.

9. Cable Type – RG-6 Coax
a. Brady TLS2200 labels – PTL-31-427, PTL-32-427
b. Brady Laser tab labels –LAT-18-361, LAT-53-361
c. Panduit.
d. or equal.

10. Cable Type – RG-59 Coax
a. Brady TLS2200 labels – PTL-31-427, PTL-32-427
b. Brady Laser tab labels – LAT-18-361, LAT-53-361
c. Panduit.
d. or equal.

11. Cable Bundles
a. Brady TLS2200 labels – PTL-12-109
b. Panduit.
c. or equal.

2.2 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE LABELS, OUTSIDE PLANT
A. Cable Tags in Manholes, Handholes, and Vaults

1. Provide tags for communications cable or wire located in manholes, handholes, and vaults.
a. The tags shall be polyethylene.
b. Machine printed - Do not provide handwritten letters.

2. Polyethylene Cable Tags
a. Provide tags of polyethylene that have an average tensile strength of 22.4 MPa (3250 pounds per square inch) 3250 pounds per square inch; and that are two millimeter (0.08 inch) 0.08 inch thick (minimum), non- corrosive non-conductive; resistive to acids, alkalis, organic solvents, and salt water; and distortion resistant to 77 degrees C 170 degrees F. b. Provide 1.3 mm (0.05 inch) 0.05 inch (minimum) thick black polyethylene tag holder.
c. Provide a one-piece nylon, self-locking tie at each end of the cable tag. d. Ties shall have a minimum loop tensile strength of 778.75 N (175 pounds) 175 pounds. The cable tags shall have black block letters, numbers, and symbols 25 mm (one inch) one inch high on a yellow background.
e. Letters, numbers, and symbols shall not fall off or change positions regardless of the cable tags' orientation.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Panduit
b. Brady
c. or equal.

2.3 COMMUNICATIONS ROOM LABELS
A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.

C. Where insert type labels are used provide clear plastic cover over label.

D. Manufacturer:

1. Copper Patch Panels
a. 4 port group
1) Brady Laser tab labels – 2.8” x 0.375” (71.12mm x 9.52mm), LAT-43-707
2) Hubbell XPLPPA series
3) Leviton
4) Panduit.
5) or equal.
b. 6 port group
1) Brady Laser tab labels – 3.6” x 0.375” (91.44mm x 9.52mm), LAT-44-707
2) Hubbell
3) Leviton
4) Panduit.
5) or equal.
c. Individual port
1) Brady
a) TLS2200 labels – 0.5” x 0.375” (12.70mm x 9.52mm)
white, PTL-44-422
b) Laser tab labels – 0.5” x 0.375” (12.70mm x 9.52mm)
white, LAT-45-707
c) TLS2200 labels – 0.5” x 0.375” (12.70mm x 9.52mm)
clear, PTL-44-430
d) Laser tab labels – 0.5” x 0.375” (12.70mm x 9.52mm)
clear, LAT-45-712
e) TLS2200 labels – 0.5” x 0.5” (12.70mm x 12.70mm)
white, PTL-7-422
f) Laser tab labels – 0.5” x 0.5” (12.70mm x 12.70mm)
white, LAT-46-707
g) TLS2200 labels – 0.5” x 0.5” (12.70mm x 12.70mm)
clear, PTL-7-430
a) Laser tab labels – 0.5” x 0.5” (12.70mm x 12.70mm) clear, LAT-46-712 2) Hubbell
3) Leviton
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 0553-6 4) Panduit.
5) or equal
d. Patch Panel Name Label.
1) Hubbell XOLPPID Series
2) Brady
3) Leviton
4) Panduit
5) or equal.

2. Non-keystone based fiber patch panels
a. Hubbell XPLFOSEPAW
b. Brady
c. Leviton
d. Panduit
e. as provided with Patch Panel by the manufacturer
f. or equal.

3. 110 blocks
a. Brady Laser tab labels – 7.9” x 0.475” (200.6mm x 12.07mm),LAT- 177-124
b. Hubbell XPL110 series.
c. Leviton
d. Panduit.
e. or equal.

2.4 GROUNDING AND BONDING, PATHWAY, AND SPACE LABELS
A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.

B. Shall be preprinted or computer printed type. Hand written labels are not acceptable.

C. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation
a. TLS2200 labels
1) PTL-20-422, Size 2.0” x 1.0” (50.80mm x 25.40mm)
2) PTL-22-422, Size 3.0” x 1.0” (76.20mm x 25.40mm)
3) PTL-37-422, Size 3.0” x 1.9” (76.20mm x 48.26mm)
4) PTL-23-422, Size 4.0” x 1.0” (101.60mm x 25.4mm)
5) PTL-38-422, Size 4.0” x 1.0” (101.60mm x 25.4mm)
b. Laser tab labels
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 0553-7 1) LAT-13-747, Size 1.875” x 0.833” (47.63mm x 21.16mm) 2) LAT-24-747, Size 1.75” x 1.0” (44.45mm x 25.40mm)
3) LAT-32-747, Size 3.0” x 0.9 “ (76.20mm x 22.86mm)
4) LAT-33-747, Size 2.0” x 1.437” (50.80mm x 36.50mm)
5) LAT-34-747, Size 3.0” x 1.437” (76.20mm x 36.50mm)
c. Continuous tape for TLS2200
1) PTL-8-422, Size 0.5” (12.70mm) white polyester
2) PTL-8-430, Size 0.5” (12.70mm) clear polyester
3) PTL-8-439, Size 0.5” (12.70mm) white vinyl
4) PTL-42-439, Size 1.0” (25.4mm) white vinyl
5) PTL-43-439, Size 1.9” (48.26mm) white vinyl

2. Panduit.

3. or equal.

2.5 WORK AREA OUTLET (WAO) LABELS
A. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements of UL 969.

B. Shall be preprinted or computer printed type. Hand written labels are not acceptable.

C. Where insert type labels are used provide clear plastic cover over label.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation
a. Desi-strip inserts
1) TLS2200 labels –1.9”x0.375”(48.26mmx9.52mm) white, PLT- 40-412
2) Laser tab labels –1.9”x0.375”(48.26mmx9.52mm) white, LAT- 176-124
b. Location ID
1) TLS2200 labels - 1.0” x 0.375” (25.40mm x 9.52mm) white, PTL-16-422
2) Laser tab labels –1.0” x 0.375” (25.40mm x 9.52mm) white, LAT-47-707
3) TLS2200 labels- 1.0” x 0.375” (25.40mm x 9.52mm) clear,PTL- 16-430
4) Laser tab labels –1.0” x 0.375” (25.40mm x 9.52mm) clear, LAT-8-712
5) TLS2200 labels- 1.0” x 0.5” (25.40mmx 12.70mm) white, PTL- 17-422
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 0553-8 6) Laser tab labels –1.0” x 0.5” (25.40mm x 12.70mm) white, LAT-7-707
7) TLS2200 labels- 1.0” x 0.5” (25.40mm x 12.70mm) clear, PTL- 17-430
8) Laser tab labels- 1.0” x 0.5” (25.40mm x 12.70mm) clear, LAT- 7-712
9) TLS2200 labels- 1.5” x 0.375” (38.10mm x 9.52mm) white, PTL-45-422
10) Laser tab labels- 1.5’ x 0.375” (38.10mm x 9.52mm) white, LAT-47-707
11) TLS2200 labels- 1.5” x 0.375” (38.10mm x 9.52mm) clear, PTL- 45-430
12) Laser tab labels-1.5” x 0.375” (38.10mm x 9.52mm) clear, LAT- 47-712
13) TLS2200 labels- 1.5” x 0.5” (38.10mm x 12.70mm) white, PTL- 29-422
14) Laser tab labels- 1.5” x 0.5” (38.10mm x 12.70mm) white, LAT- 47-707
15) TLS2200 labels- 1.5” x 0.5” (38.10mm x 12.70mm) clear, PTL- 29-430
16) Laser tab labels-1.5” x 0.5” (38.10mm x 12.70mm) clear, LAT- 47-712
c. Outlet/Jack ID
1) TLS2200 labels -0.5” x 0.375" (12.70mm x 9.52mm) white, PTL-44-422
2) Laser tab labels – 0.5” x 0.375” (12.70mm x 9.52mm) white, LAT-45-707
3) TLS2200 labels - 0.5” x 0.375” (12.70mmx 9.52mm) clear, PTL- 44-430
4) Laser tab labels –0.5” x 0.375” (12.70mmx 9.52mm) clear, LAT- 45-712
5) TLS2200 labels - 0.5” x 0.5” (12.70mm x 12.70mm) white, PTL-7-422
6) Laser tab labels- 0.5” x 0.5” (12.70mm x 12.70mm) white, LAT- 46-707
7) TLS2200 labels - 0.5” x 0.5” (12.70mm x 12.70mm) clear, PTL- 7-430
8) Laser tab labels - 0.5” x 0.5” (12.70mm x 12.70mm) clear, LAT- 46-712
d. General Use Labels
1) TLS2200 labels - 0.375” (9.52mm) cont. white, PTL-46-422 Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 0553-9 2) TLS2200 labels - 0.375” (9.52mm) cont. clear, PTL-46-430

2. Hubbell
a. Location ID
1) Desi-Strip Style
b) XPLFP10W
2) Adhesive
c) XPLFPA10W, XPLFPA10W,
b. Outlet/Jack ID
1) XPLIPA10W, XPLIPA10C

3. Leviton

4. Panduit.

5. or equal.

2.6 NAMEPLATES
A. Field Fabricated Nameplates

1. Features/Function/Construction
a. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings. b. Comply with ASTM D 709.
c. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position.
d. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.
e. Surface shall be matte finish.
f. Corners shall be square.
g. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. h. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. i. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Apply labeling to clean surfaces free of oil, dust, solvents or loose material.

B. Apply after Project painting in area of application is complete.

C. Apply to locations where labeling will not be damaged, covered over or in the way of the ordinary maintenance and operation of the installed communications infrastructure or system.

When no line is evident, apply parallel to floor line. Correct conditions of labeling applied out of true.

E. Protect installed labeling from damage.

F. Replace labeling that is defaced, illegible or peeling off of the surface to which it is applied.

3.2 WORKSTATION JACK, CABLE AND PATCH PANEL ASSIGNED CIRCUIT NUMBERS A. Labeling must be done in ascending campus room number, not drawing or architect room numbers. No tables or translations will be accepted.

B. TR Room number (where cable terminates), Room number of the work area, Station Number, Jack Number (Prefixed with type “V” for voice, “D” for data) (Example: 109 122-1-V1 109 is the TR, 122 is the room where the jack is located, 1 is the station location, V1 is the 1st voice jack in that particular wall plate) C. All labeling shall be done with typed inserts, typed on adhesive labels, or pre stamped jack usage indicators for patch panels. For cabling the labeling shall be printed heat shrink labels or typed adhesive labels specifically designed for cabling. Handwritten labels are not allowed.

D. The cover plate area directly above and beneath the jacks are the labeling areas. In the top area, using the specified means, label the faceplate number assigned on the contract documents.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION & LABELING
A. Pathways

1. Pathways shall be marked at each endpoint and at all intermediate pull or junction boxes. In the case of partitioned pathways (i.e. innerduct) each partition shall have a unique identifier.

2. Label pathways using the appropriate abbreviation and a number.

3. Use adhesive type labels.

B. Labels shall be affixed at the entry to all telecommunications rooms and spaces (Includes entrance facilities, communication equipment rooms, communication equipment spaces and work areas)

1. Use adhesive type labels for all communications space labeling,

2. Affix labels to entrance doors – coordinate location with City’s Representative.

C. Cables

1. Horizontal and Indoor Backbone Cables shall be marked within 12” of each endpoint or to innerduct in which the cable is installed.

2. Except where installed in innerduct or conduit, all backbone fiber optic cable shall have affixed to the outer jacket, labels of a bright color that contain at least the legend "FIBER OPTIC CABLE." These labels must be affixed at separations no greater than 50 ft.

3. Within every manhole/vault/pullbox and within 4 ft of the entrance into a building every backbone cable’s assigned identifier shall be affixed to either the cable’s outer jacket or to innerduct in which the cable is installed.

4. Any cable installed in conduit shall be labeled at all intermediate pull or junction boxes.

5. Label cables using the appropriate circuit ID.

6. Use adhesive type labels for all communications cable labels.

7. Affix labels to cables – marking cable is not permitted.

8. Where cable is fully encased in innerduct label the outside of the innerduct with the cable label and, where the contents are fiber optic cabling, the "FIBER OPTIC CABLE" label.

D. 110 blocks

1. Each cable termination position on 110 blocks shall be labeled with number designators.
a. All backbone copper cable termination blocks shall be labeled with both the pair count of every 5th pair and the cable’s assigned identifier.

2. Where insert type labels are used install clear plastic cover over reprinted or Laser printed type label. Install five (5) pair and four (4) pair 110 I.D. strips for backbone cabling.

3. 110 block cable ID label shall be as follows:
a. Label shall be Sacramento Public Library generated cable number - from Telecommunications Room (TR) number - cable pair count per 25 pairs (1-25, 26-50, etc.).
b. 'From' City building Telecommunications Room (TR) number for ISP riser or 'From' City building number for OSP cable.
c. Cable pair count per 25 pairs (1-25, 26-50, etc.)
d. City's Representative to provide Sacramento Public Library generated cable number.

4. Pair call-out labeling: Pair call-out labeling shall designate every fifth (5th) pair consecutively through total pair count of the cable terminated on the block but not including the first (1st) and twenty-fifth (25th) pairs of each twenty-five (25) pair field bundle: Example for fifty (50) pair cable -- 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 35, 40, 45.

5. All labels shall be machine/printer created labels.

E. Horizontal Copper Patch Panel Labeling

1. Label placement.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 0553-12 a. WAO jack assignment number and TR patch panel port number shall be the same number. Example: A horizontal cable terminated on WAO jack 001 shall be terminated on patch panel port 001. A horizontal cable terminated on WAO jack 099 shall be terminated on patch panel port 099.
b. Start patch panel port labeling at the first port in the patch panel that is at the top of the equipment rack closest to the wall. Work left to right and down that equipment rack to the last patch panel port within that equipment rack. Continue to the next equipment rack, starting in its upper left hand corner and moving down the rack, if more than one (1) equipment rack supporting WAO horizontal cabling is installed in the TR.

2. Patch Panel Port Label content and format shall be YZZZ where:
a. ZZZ = the WAO jack number the cable is terminated on - 001 through 999.
b. Y = the floor number the TR and WAOs are on - use zero (0) for basement.
c. Example: 2055 = (2) second floor, (055) fifty-fifth WAO/Patch Panel port. As an observation, the above number is also a key component of the horizontal cable number.

3. All labels shall be machine/printer created labels.

F. Backbone Fiber Patch Panel Labeling

1. Each backbone fiber patch panel shall have a header label. a. Header Label format and content shall be as follows:
1) Sacramento Public Library generated cable number.

2. 'From' City building Telecommunication Room (TR) number for ISP riser or 'From' City building number for OSP cable.
1) Fiber strand type designation and strand count. SM (single mode) XX; MM (multi-mode) XX where XX = strand count. If cable is a hybrid make sure both strand type counts are accounted for in header label.
b. City's Representative to provide Sacramento Public Library generated cable number.
c. Fiber Patch Panel Port Labeling: Label each fiber patch panel port with the strand count terminated on the port. Example for a duplex port termination: 5-6 = strand 5 and strand 6 of cable are terminated on this fiber patch panel port. Simplex port termination 6 = strand 6 is of cable is terminated on this fiber patch panel port.
d. All labels shall be printed labels. Hand labeling is not acceptable unless approved in writing as acceptable by the City’s Representative.

G. Voice Cross-Connect System Labeling
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS SECTION 27 0553-13

1. The 110-Blocks shall be labeled “Voice Cross-Connect to Rack #_ Panel #__”.

Each cable shall be numbered from 1-48 on the 110-block Designation Strips.

2. The patch panels on the racks shall be labeled “Voice Cross-Connect Rack #_ Panel #__”. Each jack shall be numbered from 1-48 on each panel.

H. Workstations

1. All faceplate labels shall indicate the faceplate number and the circuit ID for each cable that it houses

2. For faceplates where insert type labels are used install clear plastic cover over preprinted or Laser printed type label.

3. For faceplates without insert type labels use adhesive type labels affix labels to faceplate – marking faceplates is not permitted.

4. Patch cords cords installed under the work of this Project shall be labeled at each endpoint using the appropriate circuit ID.

5. Use adhesive type labels for all communications cable labels.

6. Affix labels to cables – marking cable is not permitted.

I. Grounding and Bonding

1. The TMGB(s) (telecommunications main ground bar) shall be labeled as such with an adhesive type label(s) affix label(s) to TMGB.

2. The conductor connecting the TMGB (telecommunications main ground bar) to the building ground shall be labeled at each end with an affixed label in a visible location as close as practicable to the bonding point at each end of the conductor.

J. Firestopping

1. Each firestopping location shall be labeled at each location where firestopping is installed, on each side of the penetrated fire barrier, within 300 mm (12 in.) of the firestopping material.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-1 SECTION 27 1000 - STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER DIVISION 27 SECTIONS
A. Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications applies to the work of this Section.

1.3 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies common standards, means and methods for the work of the following Sections:

1. Section 27 11 19 – Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels

2. Section 27 11 23 – Communications Cable Management

3. Section 27 13 00 – Communications Interior Backbone Cabling

4. Section 27 14 00 – Communications Outside Plant Backbone Cabling

5. Section 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling

1.4 REFERENCES
A. Usage: In accordance with Division 1.

B. In Addition to the requirements of Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications, conform to the applicable portions of the following standards agencies:

1. American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM A228/A228M-02 Steel Wire, Music Spring Quality.

2. Bellcore
a. TR-NWT-000253Intermediate Reach, 1, OC3

3. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
a. The Code of Federal Regulations, Title 47, Telecommunications, Chapter 1 - FCC Part 68 (1982 issue or latest revision) (47 CFR 68) .

4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
a. IEEE 383-2003 Standard for Qualifying Class 1E Electric Cables and Field Splices for Nuclear Power Generating Stations
b. IEEE 100-00 The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms

5. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-2 a. ICEA S-56-434 (1983, 5th Ed.) Reaffirmed October 18, 1991 Polyolefin Insulated Communication Cables for Outdoor Use.
b. ANSI/ICEA S-83-596-2011 Indoor Optical Fiber Cables
c. ANSI/ICEA S-84-608-2010 Telecommunications Cable, Filled Polyolefin Insulated Copper Conductor
d. ANSI/ICEA S-86-634-2011 Buried Distribution & Service Wire, Filled Polyolefin Insulated, Copper Conductor.
e. ANSI/ICEA S-87-640-2011 Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable
f. ICEA S-102-700-2004 – ICEA Standard For Category 6 Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables (With Or Without An Overall Shield) For Use In Communications Wiring Systems Technical Requirements
g. ICEA S-103-701-2011 Riser Cables Technical Requirements

6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a. NEMA WC 63.1(2000) Twisted Pair Premise Voice and Data Communications Cables

7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

8. Telecommunications Industry Association (ANSI/TIA)
a. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises
b. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, 2009
c. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard, published 2009
d. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, published 2008, including errata issued in October, 2008. e. ANSI/TIA 569-C (2012) Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces f. ANSI/TIA-606-B (2012) Administration Standard Telecommunications Infrastructure
g. ANSI- J-STD-607-B (2011) Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises

9. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
a. UL 444(2002; Bul. 2002, 2003) Communications Cables
b. UL 910(1998) Flame-Propagation and Smoke-Density Values for Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Used in Spaces Transporting Environmental Air
c. UL 1286(1999; R 2004) Office Furnishings
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-3 d. UL 1581 Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords. Oct. 2001
e. UL 1666(2000; R 2002) Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts
f. UL 1863(2000; R 2004) Communications Circuit Accessories

1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in this specification shall be as defined in

1. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises, 2009

2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, 2009

3. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and Components Standard, published 2009

4. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard, published 2008, plus errata issued in October, 2008.

5. ANSI/TIA-606-B (2012) Administration Standard Telecommunications Infrastructure

6. IEEE Std 100 and

7. Section 27 05 00

8. As defined in this Section.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and the following:

B. Shipping Conditions:

1. All cable shall be shipped on reels or manufacturer supplied “handy boxes”.

2. The diameter of the drum shall be at least 13 times the diameter of the cable.

3. The reels shall be substantial and so constructed as to prevent damage during shipment and handling.

4. Secure the outer end of the cable to the reel head so as to prevent the cable from becoming loose in transit.

5. Project the inner end of the cable into a slot in the side of the reel, or into a housing on the inner slot of the drum, in such a manner and with sufficient length to make it available for testing.

6. The inner end shall be fastened so as to prevent the cable from becoming loose during installation. End seals shall be applied to each of the cables to prevent moisture from entering the cable.

C. Storage:

1. Do not roll or store cable reels without an appropriate underlay.

2. Retain factory cable protection until installation. Supplement with heavy gauge plastic sheeting if factory protective membrane is pierced prior to installation.

Tape ends and seams water and dust tight.

3. The reels with cable shall be suitable for outside storage conditions when the temperature ranges from minus 40 degrees C to plus 65 degrees C, with relative humidity from 0 to 100 percent.

4. Protect cable reels from physical damage from site construction vehicles or from settling into the soil.

5. Equipment, other than outside plant rated cable protected with fully watertight cable caps, to be delivered and placed in storage, suitably protected from the weather, humidity and temperature variation, dirt and dust, or other contaminants.

D. Handling

1. Cabling other than outside plant cabling exposed to standing water or other liquids at any time during storage, delivery or placement shall be replaced at no expense to the City.

2. Cut ends of outside plant rated cabling or portions of outside plant rated cable with a damaged jacket shall not be exposed to standing water or other liquids at any time during storage, delivery or placement. Where such conditions occur, the City's Representative may require that the cable be replaced at no cost to the City.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.10 SEQUENCING
A. Not Used.

1.11 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
A. Telephone (Voice) Copper Cabling Plant:

1. Suitable for direct connection to the Public Switched Network in accordance with rules set forth by FCC Part 68, California Public Utilities Commission, and other Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

2. Category 3 as defined in ANSI/TIA-568-C.2
B. Horizontal (Station) Category 6 Copper Cabling – Permanent Link

1. Testing shall commence while the City's equipment in the area of service is operational and creating worst case emissions associated with its operation while in good working order. Every effort shall be made to include worst case influence on the materials install shall be taken.

2. In accordance with the field test specifications defined in ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 “Commercial Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard”, every horizontal station cabling link in the project shall be tested for:
a. Wire Map
b. Length
c. Insertion Loss
d. NEXT Loss
e. PS NEXT Loss
f. ACR-F Loss
g. PS ACR-F Loss
h. Return Loss
i. Propagation Delay
j. Delay Skew

3. Using the listed Category 6 cable test set, test installed cabling using Permanent Link procedure and submit report demonstrating that the link meets the following parameters:

4. Frequency
(MHz)
Insertion
Loss
NEXT
(Worst
pair to
pair)
Power
Sum
NEXT
ELFEXT
(Worst
pair to
pair)
Power
Sum
ELFEXT
Return
Loss

1.0 2.0 79.3 77.3 72.8 69.8 20.0

4.0 3.8 70.3 68.3 60.7 57.7 23.6

10.0 5.9 64.3 62.3 52.8 49.8 26.0

16.0 7.5 61.3 59.3 48.7 45.7 26.0

20.0 8.4 59.8 57.8 46.7 43.7 26.0

31.3 10.6 56.9 54.9 42.9 39.9 25.0

62.5 15.3 52.4 50.4 36.8 33.8 23.5
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-6 Frequency
(MHz)
Insertion
Loss
NEXT
(Worst
pair to
pair)
Power
Sum
NEXT
ELFEXT
(Worst
pair to
pair)
Power
Sum
ELFEXT
Return
Loss
100.0 19.7 49.3 47.3 32.8 29.8 22.5
150.0 24.7 48.7 44.7 29.3 26.3 21.6
200.0 29 44.8 42.8 26.8 23.8 21.0
250.0 32.6 43.3 41.3 24.8 21.8 20.5
a. Each permanent link shall demonstrate a positive PSACR beyond 350 MHz to meet and exceed the bandwidth requirements of TIA-568-C.2 Category 6 standards. Each permanent link shall demonstrate 2 dB of cross talk headroom over TIA-568-C.2 Category 6 standard for NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT and PSELFEXT bit error rate.

5. Report whether tested link passes or fails

6. Note exceptions to required Category standards. Remedy and retest C. Fiber Optic Cabling - as specified herein below.

1.12 TESTING
A. General

1. In addition to the tests detailed in this specification section, the contractor shall notify the City’s Representative of any additional tests that are deemed necessary to guarantee a fully functional system. The contractor shall carry out and record any additional measurement results at no additional charge

2. Test and report on each intermediate cabling segment separately, including station cabling, horizontal distribution (each segment, if multiple) and telecommunications room wiring.

3. Test each end to end cable link.

4. Submit machine-generated documentation and raw data of all test results on Contractor-provided, and City’s Representative approved, forms; and in electronic format approved by the City’s Representative.

5. Provide machine-generated data on an appropriate disk media (CD-ROM CD-R format) to be transferred to the City’s computers.
a. Where the machine-generated documentation requires use of a proprietary computer program to view the data, provide the City with 1 licensed copy of the software.

6. Provide registered testing software used for the actual tests to the City for review of test data.

B. Test Equipment:

1. Provide in conformance with the applicable requirements of 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications.

2. Test systems using at least one (1) each of the following test measurement devices or their functional equivalents:
a. Level IIIe field testers as defined in ANSI/TIA-1152 - Fluke DX-1800, Agilent or equal.
1) The tester including the appropriate interface adapter must meet the specified accuracy requirements. The accuracy requirements for the permanent link test configuration (baseline accuracy plus adapter contribution) are specified in Table 4 of ANSI/TIA-1152 (Table 4 in this TIA document also specifies the accuracy requirements for the Channel configuration).
2) The RJ45 test plug shall fall within the values specified in ANSI/TIA-568-C Annex C for NEXT, FEXT and Return Loss.
3) The tester interface adapters must be of high quality and the cable shall not show any twisting or kinking resulting from coiling and storing of the tester interface adapters. In order to deliver optimum accuracy, preference is given to a permanent link interface adapter for the tester that can be calibrated to extend the reference plane of the Return Loss measurement to the permanent link interface. The contractor shall provide proof that the interface has been calibrated within the period recommended by the vendor. To ensure that normal handling on the job does not cause measurable Return Loss change, the adapter cord cable shall not be of twisted-pair construction.. b. Outside Plant Voice Cabling Plant tester - capable of detecting shorts, opens, reversals, mis-wiring and crosstwists. (Siemon STM-8, Fluke or equal).
c. Tone Test Sets.
d. Optical Power Meter (Corning Cable Systems, Fluke DTX-1800 or equal)
1) Power measurement uncertainty of ± 0.25 dB.
2) Store reference power measurement.
3) Save at least 100 results in internal memory.
4) PC interface (serial or USB).
5) Minimum Performance - Single Mode Power Meter
a) 1300nm and 1500nm (± 20 nm) wavelength dual laser
light sources.
b) Output power of –10 dBm minimum
c) Output Stability +/- 0.40 dB from 0 to 50 degrees C
d) Long Term output stability +/- 0.10dB at 25 degrees C e) Measurement range shall be from 10 to -60 dBm
f) Accuracy shall be +/- 5% at 0 to -50dBm and +/- 10% 10 to 0dBm and -50 to -60 dBm.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-8 g) Resolution shall be 0.1 dB
h) Connector types shall include: LC, ST, SC.
e. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer. (Fluke, JDSU or equal). 1) Singlemode OTDR
a) Wavelengths of 1310 nm (± 20 nm) and 1550 nm (± 20
nm).
b) Event deadzones of 3.5 m maximum at 1310 nm and
1550 nm.
c) Attenuation deadzones of 10 m maximum at 1310 nm
and 12 m maximum at 1550 nm.
d) Distance range not less than 10000 m.
e) Dynamic range at least 10 dB at 1310 nm and 1550 nm
f. Site portable communications systems (walkie-talkie, cell phone or similar).
g. Any other items of equipment or materials required to demonstrate conformance with the Contract Documents.

C. Station Wiring, General

1. Test station wire only after all pairs of station wire in a work area have been terminated at both ends, and no work of this Section or other Sections may cause physical disturbance to the wiring.

2. Correct any and all transpositions found. Retest.

3. If any conductor in a station wire tests either open or short, then the entire station wire is to be removed, replaced, and re-tested.

D. Inside Category 6 Cabling.

1. Using the listed Category 6 cable test set, test and submit report on the parameters specified for Category 6 cabling in this Section. Report whether tested link passes or fails the Category 6 standards. Cables must pass TIA Permanent Link Certification for the cable type being installed. A "Marginal" test result will not be accepted.

2. Note exceptions to required Category standards. Remedy and retest.

E. Telephone: Outside Plant, Inside Riser Wire:

1. General:
a. A new cable shall be tested only after all wires within the cable have been terminated at both ends.
b. For unshielded cable, "measurements to ground" means an electrical connection to the Telecommunications Ground Bus, building steel, electrical metallic conduit or a water pipe.
c. The Contractor shall correct all defects possible.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-9 d. If the maximum number of unrepairable defective pairs exceeds 4% of the cable's pair count, the cable shall be deemed unacceptable and shall be replaced. Replace, re-terminate and retest new cable at no additional cost to the City.

2. Test procedures:
a. TEST #1 – Continuity:
1) Meter set for 20 ohm full scale ohm reading. Each pair shall be shorted at one end and the loop resistance value read at the other. 2) The difference between the largest and the smallest resistance reading from each pair in the cable shall be no more than 10 percent of the largest reading.
b. TEST #2 - Balance, Polarity and Conductor Transpositions:
1) Upon passing Test #1, the tester at one end of cable shall ground tip side of each pair in turn. The tester at other end of cable reads resistance to building ground of same conductor.
c. REQUIREMENT: Reading for each tip conductor in pair of approximately one-half the loop resistance value from Test #1.

3. Test Report:
a. Submit Test Report. Documentation shall include loop resistance regarding any opens, shorts, transpositions found, as well as corrective action taken to correct any found opens, shorts, or transpositions.

F. Fiber Optic Cabling.

1. Perform fiber optic cable testing on all installed fiber optic cabling. Submit test results.

2. All testing procedures and field-test instruments shall comply with applicable requirements of:
a. ANSI Z136.2, ANS For Safe Use Of Optical Fiber Communication Systems Utilizing Laser Diode And LED Sources
b. ANSI/EIA/TIA 455 50B, Light Launch Conditions For Long-Length Graded-Index Optical Fiber Spectral Attenuation Measurements c. ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-59A, Measurement of Fiber Point Discontinuities Using an OTDR.
d. ANSI/TIA/EIA 455 60A, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Length Using an OTDR.
e. ANSI/TIA/EIA 455 61A, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Attenuation Using an OTDR.
f. ANSI/TIA/EIA 526 7, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Singlemode Fiber Cable Plant.
g. ANSI/TIA/EIA 526 14 A, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-10 h. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises.
i. ANSI/TIA 568 C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. j. ANSI/TIA-606-B (2012) Administration Standard Telecommunications Infrastructure, including the requirements specified by the customer, unless the customer specifies their own labeling requirements.

3. Trained technicians who have successfully attended an appropriate training program, which includes testing with an OLTS and an OTDR and have obtained a certificate as proof thereof shall execute the tests. These certificates may have been issued by any of the following organizations or an equivalent organization:
a. Manufacturer of the fiber optic cable and/or the fiber optic connectors. b. Manufacturer of the test equipment used for the field certification. c. Training organizations (e.g., BICSI, A Telecommunications Association headquarters in Tampa, Florida; ACP [Association of Cabling Professionals™] Cabling Business Institute located in Dallas, Texas)

4. Submit calibration certification for testing equipment to be used and certification of training of persons proposed to perform specified testing prior to scheduling testing.

5. The City’s Representative shall be provided with the opportunity witness and/or review field-testing.

6. The City’s Representative shall be notified of the start date of the testing phase five (5) business days before testing commences.

7. The City’s Representative will select a random sample of 5% of the installed links. The City’s Representative shall test these randomly selected links and the results are to be stored in the manner described in this section. The results obtained shall be compared to the data provided by the installation contractor. If more than 2% of the sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the installation contractor shall repeat 100% testing at no cost to the City.

8. Submit test report no later than five days after the cables are tested. 1)

1.13 ACCEPTANCE OF FIBER OPTIC TEST RESULTS
A. Each cabling link shall be in compliance with the following test limits:

1. Optical loss testing
a. Singlemode and Mutlmode links
1) The link attenuation shall be calculated by the following formulas as specified in ANSI/TIA-568-C.0.
a) Link Attenuation (dB) = Cable_Attn (dB) +
Connector_Attn (dB) + Splice_Attn (dB)
b) Cable_Attn (dB) = Attenuation_Coefficient (dB/km) *
Length (Km)
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-11 c) Connector_Attn (dB) = number_of_connector_pairs *
connector_loss (dB)
d) Maximum allowable connector_loss = 0.4 dB
e) Splice_Attn (dB) = number_of_splices * splice_loss
(dB)
f) Maximum allowable splice_loss = 0.05 dB
g) The values for the Attenuation_Coefficient (dB/km) are listed in the table below:

Type of Optical Fiber Wavelength
(nm)
Attenuation
coefficient
(dB/km)
Wavelength
(nm)
Attenuation
coefficient
(dB/km)
Single-mode (Inside plant) 1310 1.0 1550 1.0
Single-mode (Outside plant) 1310 0.5 1550 0.5
Multimode 850 2.5 1300 0.8

2. 3. OTDR Testing. Not required if fiber passes required optical loss testing. a. Reflective events (connections) shall not exceed 0.4 dB. b. Non-reflective events (splices) shall not exceed 0.05 dB.

B. All installed cabling links shall be field-tested and pass the test requirements and analysis as described in Part 3. Any link that fails these requirements shall be diagnosed and corrected. Any corrective action that must take place shall be documented and followed with a new test to prove that the corrected link meets performance requirements. The final and passing result of the tests for all links shall be provided in the test results documentation in accordance with Part 3.

C. Acceptance of the test results shall be given in writing after the project is fully completed and tested in accordance with Contract Documents and to the satisfaction of the City.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMUNICATIONS CABLES AND RELATED
A. GENERAL:

1. Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comply with TIA-568- C.1, TIA-568-C.2, TIA-568-C.3 and NFPA 70.

2. Ship cable on reels and/or in boxes bearing manufacture date for UTP in accordance with ICEA S-90-661 and optical fiber cables in accordance with ICEA S-83-596 for all cable used on this project.

3. Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of installation shall not be used.

4. Comply with applicable Code for insulation, jacket, marking and listing for applicable use.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-12 a. At plenums, provide type CMP or OFNP cabling.
b. At risers, provide type CMR or OFNR cabling
c. At horizontal wiring conditions, provide type CM or OFN cabling.

5. Refer to Section 27 14 00 - Communications Outside Plant Backbone Cabling for underground cabling installation

2.2 FIBER OPTIC CABLING, GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
A. General

1. Fiber count per cable to comply with minimum counts indicated on the plans.

Plans indicate specific cable counts providing quantities of single mode fiber strands.

2. Quantities are minimum quantities. At Contractor’s option, provide a greater number. Where a greater number are provided, terminate, test, label and document all strands on fiber patch panels and/or terminal boxes as indicated as if quantity provided were called out for on the plans.

3. Comply with applicable Code for insulation, jacket, marking and listing for applicable use.
a. Provide nonconductive optical fiber general purpose cable (OFN or OFNG), nonconductive optical fiber plenum cable (OFNP), and nonconductive optical fiber riser cable (OFNR) rated cable in accordance with NFPA 70 and UL 910.
b. Type OFNP or OFNR may be substituted for type OFN or OFNG and type OFNP may be substituted for type OFNR in accordance with NFPA

70. 4. Fiber media shall, at minimum, meet the following performance standards:
a. ANSI/TIA 568-C.1
b. ANSI/TIA 568-C.3

5. Fiber media shall, at minimum, meet one of the following construction standards:
a. ANSI/ICEA S-87-640-2011 Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable
b. ANSI/ICEA S-83-596-2011 Indoor Optical Fiber Cables

6. Construction
a. Indoor: All dielectric, unless otherwise noted.
b. Outdoor: All dielectric, unless otherwise noted.

7. The cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be in accordance with EIA TIA/EIA-598-B.
a. Colors shall be across specified storage/installation temperature range. b. Means of providing conforming colors shall not degrade performance of cable.

8. Jacket:
a. Free of splits, holes or blisters.
b. Marked and listed in conformance with California Electric Code 770 c. Conform with
1) UL 1666 and
2) NFPA 70
d. Heavy duty construction, Fiberglass Epoxy Rod/Kevlar strength member(s).
e. Each fiber to be 100% attenuation tested by the Manufacturer prior to shipping. Manufacturer’s test to be affixed to shipping reel. f. Cable shall be imprinted with fiber count, fiber type and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches. Hybrid fiber optic cable marking shall comply with TIA/EIA-598-B.

9. Performance:
a. All fibers in the cable must be usable and meet required specifications. b. Each optical fiber shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of this specification.
c. Temperature Sensitivity:
1) Storage: -40C degrees to +70C degrees.
2) Installation: -30C degrees to +70C degrees.
d. Variance:
1) Single Mode:
a) Average change, not more than 0.05 dB/km at 1550 -
40C degrees to +70C degrees.
b) Maximum change not more than 0.15 dB/km at 1550
nm.

B. Fiber Strands, Singlemode – General

1. Meeting
a. ISO/IEC 24702 OS2
b. TIA 568C.3 OS2

2. Construction:
a. Each optical fiber shall consist of a germania-doped silica core surrounded by a concentric glass cladding. The fiber shall be a matched clad design.
b. Each optical fiber shall be proof tested by the fiber manufacturer at a minimum of 100 kpsi (0.7 GN/m2).

The coating shall be in physical contact with the cladding surface. d. The attenuation specification shall be a maximum value for each cabled fiber at 23 ± 5 °C on the original shipping reel.
e. Single-mode (Dispersion Un-shifted): The single-mode fiber shall meet EIA/TIA-492CAAB, "Detail Specification for Class IVa Dispersion- Unshifted Single-Mode Optical Fibers with Low Water Peak," and ITU recommendation G.652 (Categories A, B, C & D), “Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable.”
f. Meets or exceeds ISO/IEC 11801 OS2
g. Geometry
1) Cladding Diameter (μm): 125.0 ± 0.7
2) Core-to-Cladding Concentricity (μm): ≤ 0.5
3) Cladding Non-Circularity: ≤ 0.7 %
4) Mode Field Diameter (μm)
a) 1310 nm: 9.2 ± 0.4
b) 1550 nm: 10.4 ± 0.5
5) Coating Diameter (μm): 245 ± 5
6) Colored Fiber Nominal Diameter (μm): 249 – 259
7) Fiber Curl radius of curvature (m): > 4.0 m
h. Optical
1) Cabled Fiber Attenuation (dB/km)
a) 1310 nm: ≤ 0.4
b) 1550 nm: ≤ 0.3
2) Point discontinuity (dB)
a) 1310 nm: ≤ 0.05
b) 1550 nm: ≤ 0.05
3) Macrobend Attenuation
Turns Mandrel OD
(mm)
dB
1 32 ± 2 ≤ 0.05 at 1550
nm
100 32 ± 2 ≤ 0.05 at 1310
nm
100 50 ± 2 ≤ 0.05 at 1550
nm
100 60 ± 2 ≤ 0.05 at 1625
nm
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-15 4)
5) Cable Cutoff Wavelength (λ ccf ) (nm): < 1260
6) Zero Dispersion Wavelength (λo) (nm): 1302 ≤ λo ≤ 1324 7) Zero Dispersion Slope (So) (ps/(nm²km)): ≤ 0.092
8) Total Dispersion (ps/(nmkm))
a) 1285-1330 nm: ≤ 3.8
b) 1550 nm: ≤ 17.5
c) 1625 nm: ≤ 21.6
9) Cabled Polarization Mode Dispersion (ps√km): ≤ 0.2
10) IEEE 802.3 GbE - 1300 nm Laser Distance (m): up to 5000 11) Water Peak Attenuation: 1383 ± 3 nm (dB/km): ≤ 0.4
i. Strand Manufacturer:
1) Corning
2) OFS
3) or equal.

C. Fiber Strands, Mutlimode – General

1. Meeting
a. TIA 568C.3 OM4
b. Construction:
c. Multi-mode
d. Core Diameter: 50 ± 3.0μm
e. Each fiber to be 100% proof-tested by the manufacturer to sustain 100 kpsi load minimum.
f. Minimum Performance:
g. Bandwidth:
h. ANSI/TIA 568C.3 Overfilled launch bandwidth:
i. (1) 850 nm ≥ 3500 MHz at 1 km
j. 1300 nm ≥ 500 MHz at 1 km
k. ANSI/TIA 568C.3 Effective laser launch bandwidth:
l. (1) 850 nm ≥ 4700 MHz at 1 km
m. Attenuation:
n. Meets ANSI/TIA 568C.3 OM4 and TIA-492AAAD.
o. 850 nm: 2.5 dB/km
p. 1300 nm: 0.8 dB/km.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-16 q. Water Immersion: Induced attenuation, 23°C water immersion: ≤0.05 dB/km
r. Strand Manufacturer:
1) Corning
2) OFS
3) or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. All system cabling and terminations be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as shown.

B. All necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system shall be provided. All installation work must be done in accordance with the safety requirements set forth in the general requirements of ANSI C2 and NFPA

70. C. Coordinate insulation displacement (quick connect) terminal devices with wire size and type. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Make connections with automatic impact type tooling set to recommended force.

D. Dress, lace or harness all wire and cable to prevent mechanical stress on electrical connections. No wire or cable shall be supported by a connection point. Provide service loops where harnesses of different classes cross, or where hinged panels are to be interconnected.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to the cable during placement.

1. Cabling shall be maintained free of splits, holes or blisters.

2. Cabling shall not be painted or exposed to construction solvents or other caustic chemicals unless rated and warrantied for such exposure by its manufacturer.

F. Correct unacceptable wiring conditions including but not limited to:

1. Deformed, brittle or cracked insulation.

2. Torn or worn cable jacket.

3. Excessively scored cable jackets.

4. Insulation shrunken or stripped further than 1/8" away from the actual point of connection within a connector, or on a punch block.

5. Ungrommeted, unbushed, or uninsulated wire or cable entries.

6. Deformation or improper radius of wire or cable.

7. Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-17

3.2 SPLICING
A. All interior wire and outside plant/exterior cable shall be continuous and splice-free for the entire length of run between designated connections or terminations.

B. At designated splices, maintain conductor color code across all splices.

C. All shielded cables shall be insulated. Do not permit shields to contact conduit, raceway, boxes, panels or equipment enclosures.

D. Within buildings, make splices only in designated terminal cabinets and/or on designated equipment backboards.

E. Backbone Copper Cabling

1. At interior: Provide splice free cabling between Telecommunications Rooms, and from Telecommunications rooms to all locations in the same building indicated for backbone copper cabling media.

2. At outside plant: Do not splice at exterior, unless different splicing is indicated on Plans or is unavoidable due to either cable length exceeding the maximum commercially available in the indicated pair count, or due to on-site pulling conditions. In either condition, provide documentation of the condition to the City's Representative for review prior to proceeding. If the City's Representative concurs that the conditions warrant the splice:

3. Splice only within manholes, not vaults or pullboxes.

4. Provide specified multipair splices assembly.

5. Protect the splice in an encapsulated splice case fastened to a pair of cable rack arms.

6. Document the installed splice case on the record drawings.

7. Encapsulated Closures
a. Adhere to all manufacturer installation guidelines.
b. Support closure at both ends via racks and steps, so that no unnecessary stress or weight is applied to the splice case or associated conductors. c. End Caps and Closure Extension Sleeves
1) Adhere to all manufacturer installation guidelines.
d. Encapsulants
1) Adhere to all manufacturer installation guidelines.
e. Splicing Tapes
1) Adhere to all manufacturer usage guidelines.
f. Gel Stripper
1) Adhere to all manufacturer usage guidelines.

F. Fiber Optic Cabling
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-18

1. At interior: Provide splice free cabling between Telecommunications rooms, and from Telecommunications rooms to all locations in the same building indicated for backbone fiber cabling media.

2. At outside plant: Do not splice at exterior unless splicing is indicated on Plans or is unavoidable due to either cable length exceeding the maximum commercially available in the indicated strand count, or due to on-site pulling conditions. In either condition, provide documentation of the condition to the City's Representative for review prior to proceeding. If the City's Representative concurs that the conditions warrant the splice:

3. Splice only within manholes.

4. Provide fusion splices.

5. Protect the splice in a fiberoptic splice case fastened to a pair of cable rack arms.

6. Document the installed splice case on the record drawings.

7. Splicing, where required due to field pulling conditions and/or cable length limits, shall be provided at no additional cost to the City.

G. Ensure that all splice closures are properly sealed for protection of the cable and splices.

3.3 PULLING IN
A. Verify that all raceway has been de-burred and properly joined, coupled, and terminated prior to installation of cables. Verify that all raceway is clear of foreign matter and substances prior to installation of wire or cable.

B. Inspect all conduit bends to verify proper radius. Comply with Code for minimum permissible radius and maximum permissible deformation.

C. Apply a chemically inert lubricant to all wire and cable prior to pulling in conduit. Do not subject wire and cable to tension greater than that recommended by the manufacturer.

Use multi-spool rollers where cable is pulled in place around bends. Do not pull reverse bends.

D. Provide a box loop for all wire and cable routed through junction boxes or distribution panels. Cable loops and bends shall not be bent at a radius greater than that recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Pull Rope/Tape

1. For OSP installations, pull new pulling ‘mule’ tape through all conduits while placing new backbone cable. Leave a pulling ‘mule’ tape in the utilized conduits for future use.

2. For ISP installations, pull new pull rope through all conduits while placing new backbone cable. Leave a pull rope in the utilized conduits for future use.

F. Do not leave cable slack on cable runway
G. Firestop all sleeves, station cable conduit and ISP backbone conduit openings through rated partitions after the cable installation is complete.

3.4 SUPPORT
A. Support: Provide support for all cabling. Conform to the restrictions of the California Electric Code and Section 27 05 29. Secure all wire and cable run vertically for continuous distances greater than thirty (30) feet. Secure robust non-coaxial cables with screw-flange nylon cable ties or similar devices appropriate to weight of cable. For all other cables, provide symmetrical conforming nonmetallic bushings or woven cable grips appropriate to weight of cable.

B. Separation from sources of Electromagnetic Interference: Conform with the requirements of ANSI/TIA-569-C, 9.3 Pathway Separation from EMI sources.

3.5 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING
A. ADMINISTRATION

1. Administration of the documentation shall include test results of each fiber link.

2. The test result information for each link shall be recorded in the memory of the field-test instrument upon completion of the test.

3. The test result records saved within the field-test instrument shall be transferred into a Windows™-based database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of these test records.

B. GENERAL

1. All tests performed on optical fiber cabling that use a laser or LED in a test set shall be carried out with safety precautions in accordance with ANSI Z136.2.

2. All outlets, cables, patch panels and associated components shall be fully assembled and labeled prior to field-testing. Any testing performed on incomplete systems shall be redone on completion of the work.

C. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE TESTING

1. Field-test instruments shall have the latest software and firmware installed.

2. Link test results from the OLTS shall be recorded in the test instrument upon completion of each test for subsequent uploading to a PC in which the administrative documentation (reports) may be generated.

3. Testing shall be performed on each cabling segment (connector to connector).

4. Testing of the cabling shall be performed using high-quality test cords of the same fiber type as the cabling under test. The test cords for OLTS testing shall be between 1 m and 5 m in length. .
a. Optical loss testing
1) Backbone link
a) Singlemode backbone links shall be tested at 1310 nm and 1550 nm in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7,
Method A.1, One Reference Jumper or the equivalent
method.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-20 b) Link attenuation does not include any active devices or passive devices other than cable, connectors, and splices, i.e. link attenuation does not include such devices as
optical bypass switches, couplers, repeaters, or optical amplifiers.
c) Use the One Reference Jumper Method specified by
ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A, Method B and
ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Method A.1 or the equivalent
method. The user shall follow the procedures established by these standards or application notes to accurately
conduct performance testing.
d) Each fiber link shall be tested in both directions.
b. Polarity Testing
1) Paired duplex fibers in multi-fiber cables shall be tested to verify polarity in accordance with Clause E.5.3 of ANSI/TIA 568 C.0.

The polarity of the paired duplex fibers shall be verified using an OLTS.

5. Test Results Documentation
a. Test results saved within the field-test instrument shall be transferred into a Windows™-based database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of the test records. These test records shall be uploaded to the PC unaltered, i.e., “as saved in the field-test instrument”.

The file format, CSV (comma separated value), does not provide adequate protection of these records and shall not be used. PDFs shall not be used
b. The test results documentation shall be available for inspection by the City’s representative during the installation period andshall be passed to the City's Representative within 5 working days of completion of tests on cabling served by a telecommunications room or of backbone cabling.

The installer shall retain a copy to aid preparation of as built information. c. The database for the complete project, including twisted-pair copper cabling links, if applicable, shall be stored and delivered on CD-ROM prior to City acceptance of the building. This CD-ROM shall include the software tools required to view, inspect, and print any selection of the test reports.
d. Circuit IDs reported by the test instrument should match the specified label ID (see Error! Reference source not found. of this Section). e. The detailed test results documentation data is to be provided in an electronic database for each tested optical fiber and shall contain the following information:
1) The identification of the City site as specified by the City's Representative.
2) The name of the test limit selected to execute the stored test results
3) The name of the personnel performing the test
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-21 4) The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester
5) The manufacturer, model and serial number of the field-test instrument
6) The version of the test software and the version of the test limit database held within the test instrument
7) The fiber identification number
8) The length for each optical fiber
9) The index of refraction used for length calculation when using a length capable OLTS
10) Test results to include OLTS attenuation link measurements at the appropriate wavelength(s) and the margin (difference between the measured attenuation and the test limit value). 11) The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test for OLTS measurements.

3.6 CATEGORY RATED STATION PROOF OF PERFORMANCE DEMONSTRATION A. Comply with the requirements of Part 1 of this Section and the following:

1. After submittal of test result documentation and the associated as-built drawings, the City's Representative shall randomly pick five percent (5%) of the submitted cable plant installation for re-test.

2. If more than 2% of the sample results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, the installation contractor under supervision of the representative shall repeat 100% testing at no cost to the City.

3.7 LABELING
A. Reference Section 27 05 53 - Identification For Communications Systems, the plans and the specifications.

B. Comply with labeling instructions to include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Label technology to be utilized;

2. Label content;

3. Label placement

3.8 REMOVAL OF ABANDONED CABLING
A. The California Electrical Code (CEC) requires all unused telecommunications cable intended for future use to be terminated in a patch panel or cross-connect and labeled for such use. Any other unused cable is considered abandoned including cable abandoned due to installation of new cabling under the work of this Project.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 STRUCTURED CABLING, BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 27 1000-22 B. Abandoned cable must be removed and disposed of, per CEC 770.53(A) & 770.53(B) (fiber) and 800.52(B), 800.53(A) & 800.53(B) (copper). Similar requirements are elsewhere in the CEC for other types of cable.

C. Refer to Division1 regarding means and methods to be employed in the disposal of construction waste materials including material subject to recycling such as abandoned copper cabling.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS, FRAMES AND ENCLOSURES SECTION 27 1116-1 SECTION 27 1116 - COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS, FRAMES AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.

B. Related Work Under Other Sections:

1. Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications

2. Section 27 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

3. Section 27 10 00 – Structured Cabling, Basic Materials and Methods

4. Section 27 11 13 – Communications Entrance Protection

5. Section 27 11 23 – Communications Cable Management

6. Section 27 13 00 – Communications Interior Backbone Cabling

7. Section 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provision of Communications Cabinets, Racks and related

1.3 RELATED WORK BY OTHERS
A. By the Sacramento Public Library:

1. Data switching equipment.

2. Rack mounted power strips/PDU’s

1.4 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Division 26

1. Power at equipment racks, mounted to cable tray above floor mounted racks and internal to wall mounted racks unless otherwise noted.

B. Section 27 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

1. Bonds racks and cabinets.

C. Section 27 05 33 – Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems

1. Signal systems raceways at communications rooms
D. Section 27 05 36 – Cable Trays for Communications Systems

1. Signal systems cable tray at communications rooms
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS, FRAMES AND ENCLOSURES SECTION 27 1116-2 E. Section 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling

1. Rack mounted horizontal patch panels.

1.5 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. EIA-310-D (1992) Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (ANSI/EIA/310-D)

2. ANSI-J-STD-607-B (2011) Generic Telecommunications Bonding andGround (Earthing) for Customer Premises

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with the requirements of Division 1 and Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Procedures: In accordance with Division 1 and Section 27 10 00 – Structured Cabling, Basic Materials and Methods.

1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Not Used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Keys

1. Key all boxes, cabinets, enclosures, panels, controls, doors and related provided for similar usage within a system identically.

2.2 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS
A. General:

1. Provide enclosure systems including, but not limited to enclosures, cabinets, cases and related panels and accessories as specified herein. Provide size and quantity as shown on drawings or scheduled.

2. Provide color as shown on drawings. If no color is shown on drawings, submit manufacturer's standard color chips for selection.

3. Provide enclosure systems conforming to the IBC, latest edition, for bracing design.

4. Equipment Enclosures: Each rack provided with frame angles tapped 10-32, ANSI/EIA 310-D Universal Spaced.

B. Equipment Rack, Zone 4, Front, Rear and Side Access, with Vertical Wire Management.

1. Drawing References: R28

2. Minimum Features, Function & Construction:
a. Manufacturer tested Zone 4 assembly, rated for at least 755 pounds of uniformly distributed load, upper floor load, of essential equipment per California Building Code.
b. Fully welded construction provides:
1) Static load capacity: 10,000 lbs.
2) UL Listed load capacity: 2,500lbs.
3) Seismic Certified load capacity: 755 lbs.
c. Seismic certified to the following codes and standards: 2007 & 2010 CBC; 2006, 2009 & 2012 IBC; ASCE 7-05 (2005 Edition) & ASCE 7-10 (2010 Edition) and the 2006 & 2009 editions of NFPA 5000 for use in areas of high seismicity – Zone 4 or Seismic Design Category (SDC) "D". Intended for use in Mission Critical and/or High-Importance Installations in locations with the highest level of seismicity and top floor or rooftop installations including those within UBC and CBC Essential facilities or IBC, ASCE 7, and NFPA 5000 Seismic Use Group III facilities. For all codes, the Importance factor (Ip) is 1.5. d. Vertical Height (Min): 44 RU
e. Outside depth: 40” minimum - 42 inches maximum.
f. Width: Not to exceed 30 inches
g. Lockable, 70% open area perforated mesh full height front and rear doors:
1) Front door with wire mesh insert covers rack contents - swing shall be field adjustable to swing from either right or left. 2) Rear doors to be a pair of half width doors, each with a wire mesh to cover rack contents.
3) Wire mesh, vertical center split rear door pair.
h. Front and rear 19" mounting rail pairs DIN square holes on EIA spacing standard are fully adjustable in depth of setback from front to rear. i. Vertical cable management rings, continuous, full height cable management system shall be installed:
1) fully inside of the rack enclosure, with 2" minimum clearance behind front and rear rack frame.
2) fully outside (to left of left rail and to right of right rail, and out of conflict with EIA Rails. Cable management system mounting shall not occupy rail screw openings.
3) Front managers shall be accessible from front in fully loaded equipment rack.
4) Rear managers shall be accessible from rear in fully loaded equipment rack
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS, FRAMES AND ENCLOSURES SECTION 27 1116-4 j. 60% or greater perforated top panel occupying at least 50% of the stop surface of the cabinet allows passive heat radiation from rack interior to the exterior.
k. Cutouts and removable covers in cabinet top accommodates vertical transition of cabling from tray above into rack interior. l. Gangable. Racks have been designed such that they are suitable for installation either as a single, standalone unit, or in a row of identical racks (gangable).
1) Single rack installation. Provide side panels at both sides. 2) Multirack installation in a row. Bolt racks together using means provided by manufacturer. Omit side panels except at ends of row of racks – provide at ends of rows of racks.

3. Manufacturers. Provide manufacturer’s accessories or 3rd party accessories as specified elsewhere in this Section for other specified elements. Coordinate selected shelves, fans and similar with rack submitted for finish and mounting means.:
a. Middle Atlantic DRK19-44-42PRO with DLVFD-44 front door, DCLVRD-44 rear doors, MRK-Z4 Base angles, 2 pair DRK-44DUCT (front and rear, 4 total vertical ducts), MW-LVT 64% open area top insert. Keylocked side panels SPN-44-36 at ends of rows. b. APC Infrastructure
c. Hoffmann
d. Liebert/Knurr
e. Wrightline Paramount, Vantage or Vantage 2.
f. or equal.

C. Zone 4 Slide Out Rack, Steel Enclosure

1. Drawing Reference: R35

2. Features
a. Rack cabinet, 1 bay, steel frame mounted, with slide out inner frame for rear access of equipment from front of rack, floor supported. b. Zone 4 rated for up to 500 pounds of uniformly distributed load. c. 41 useable rack units.
d. Fan System, 100 cfm minimum mounted into slide out inner frame. e. No front except where called for on the plans - at such conditions, provide fully perforated steel door.
f. No rear doors
g. Locking side panels.
h. Open top outer frame
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS, FRAMES AND ENCLOSURES SECTION 27 1116-5 i. Raised floor base - provide engineered means of support where installation at raised floor conditions are indicated sufficient to maintain racks Zone 4 rating.
j. Provide vertical power strips in accordance with Section 27 11 26. k. Provide sliding shelf.

3. Manufacturer:
a. Middle Atlantic Products AXS Slide Out System in MRK Steel Host Enclosure, configured with:
1) MRK-4426AXS-Z4
2) AXS-WT50 Cable Management Tray
3) TRACK50 Service Track.
4) TRACKL Service Stand for Steel Cabinets.
5) 1 each MW-4FT fan top (openings only) in outer frame. 6) 2 each AXS-FAN with GUARD, 2 fans installed in the top of inner frame.
7) 1 each FC-4-1C Thermostatic Fan Control
8) At raised floor conditions, provide with SRB series base to match floor construction.
9) or equal (No known equal)

2.3 RACK PANELS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Rack Mounting Screws:

1. Screws 10-32; length as required for at least 1/4" excess when fully seated; oval head with black plastic non marring cup washer or equivalent ornamental head; nickel, cadmium or black plated; Phillips, Allen Hex, Square-Tip or Torx drive.

Slotted screws are not acceptable.

B. Blank Panels:

1. Construction
a. 16 gauge minimum cold rolled steel
b. Powder coat finish to match rack color, unless otherwise noted

2. Manufacturers
a. Middle Atlantic Products EB or FEB Series.
b. Ortronics Filler Panels.
c. CPI Snap-In Filler Panel
d. Atlas Sound S19 Series.
e. BGW Systems Inc. Flanged Steel Blank Panels
f. Dukane
g. Elkay
h. Lowell Series L3
i. Zero ZP112000 Series.

C. Vent Panels:

1. Construction
a. 20 gauge minimum cold rolled steel
b. 1/8" minimum holes, at least 70% open total panel cross-section. c. Powder coat finish to match rack color, unless otherwise noted

2. Manufacturers
a. Atlas Sound SVP Series.
b. BGW Systems Inc. Perforated Vent Panels
c. House of Metal Enclosures (HOME) Series PRP.
d. Lowell Series L5
e. Middle Atlantic Products VT Series.
f. Zero.
g. or equal.

D. Vertical Lacer Strips

1. 44RU high vertical steel strips with points for attachment of velco cable ties at at least 6” o.c.

2. Manufacturer:
a. Middle Atlantic LACE-44LP
b. APW
c. or equal.

E. Horizontal Lacer Bars

1. EIA 19” Width steel strips or bars suitable to provide support to large cable dressed horizontally through racks

2. Size to suit load and mounting width.

3. Manufacturer:
a. Middle Atlantic LBP-1R4, LBP-1.5 and LBP-1S.
b. APW
c. or equal.

F. Seismic Hold-down Equipment Straps

1. Drawing Reference: None - Provide as required to secure equipment that can not be screw fastened to mounting shelves.

2. Manufacturers:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS, FRAMES AND ENCLOSURES SECTION 27 1116-7 a. BGW Systems
b. Everest Electronic Equipment Lock Down Kit
c. Ergotron
d. Chatsworth Products
e. Middle Atlantic Products
f. Q-Safety, Inc.
g. or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MOUNTING
A. Unless otherwise noted, all floor supported equipment racks shall be bolted to the structure in accordance with the requirements of the CBC and the contractor's approved structural engineering submittal demonstrating the method to be used to conform to these requirements.

B. Rows of identical racks shall be bolted together, in addition to being bolted to the floor, and bonded to form a single electrical ground plane.

C. Wall mounted equipment racks and cabinets shall similarly be bolted to structural members in accordance with the requirements of the CBC and the contractor's approved structural engineering submittal demonstrating the method to be used to conform to these requirements.

3.2 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE (RACK) AND EQUIPMENT BACKBOARD FABRICATION A. Combustible material, other than incidental trim of indicated equipment, is prohibited within equipment racks.

B. Provide permanent labels for all equipment and devices.

C. Floor racks to be bolted floor unless otherwise indicated.

D. Access shall not require demounting or de-energizing of equipment. Install access covers, hinged panels, or pull-out drawers to insure complete access to terminals and interior components.

E. Provide a permanent label on the front of each equipment rack including the rack designation, and the circuit breaker number and associated electrical distribution panel designation servicing same.

F. Where wiring of mixed types are called for on the plans, maintain separation of wiring classifications as specified in the individual sections of Division 27.

G. Provide vertical wire management of cabling within the rack independent of the adjustable EIA mounting rails. Vertical wiring management provided by the contractor within the rack shall not prevent such rails from being moved as required by the Sacramento Public Library.

I. Access shall not require demounting or de-energizing of equipment or cabling. Install access covers, hinged panels, or pull-out drawers to insure complete access to terminals and interior components.

J. Fasten removable covers containing any wired component with a continuous hinge along one side, with associated wiring secured and dressed to provide an adequate service loop.

Provide an appropriate stop locks to hold all hinged panels and drawers in a serviceable position.

K. Provide permanent labels for all equipment and devices. Where possible, fasten such labels to the rack frame or to blank or vent panels which will remain in place when active equipment is removed for possible service.

L. Coordinate the design and execution of wire harnessing of multi-bay audio and video rack ensembles with conditions of delivery to installation locations at Project Site, and with the requirement herein for test of the completely wired system in the shop prior to delivery to the Project Site. Organize the wiring harnesses such that they will fold within one shippable unit without risk of damage, or provide polarized multipin connectors and related interconnect systems as specified elsewhere herein.

3.3 SIGNAL GROUNDING & BONDING PROCEDURES
A. Comply with the California Electrical Code. Bond equipment racks to ground in accordance with the California Electric Code, ANSI-J-STD-607-B-2011 Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises and Section 27 05 26
B. Equipment enclosures shall not be permitted to touch each other unless bolted together and electrically bonded.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS SECTION 27 1119-1 SECTION 27 1119 - COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Related Work Under Other Sections:

1. Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications

2. Section 27 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

3. Section 27 10 00 – Structured Cabling, Basic Materials and Methods

4. Section 27 11 13 – Communications Entrance Protection

5. Section 27 11 16 – Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures

6. Section 27 11 23 – Communications Cable Management

7. Section 27 13 00 – Communications Interior Backbone Cabling

8. Section 27 14 00 – Communications Outside Plant Backbone Cabling

9. Section 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes material standards for:

1. Copper Termination Assemblies, including
a. Rack and cabinet mounted copper patch panels
b. Backboard, rack and cabinet mounted terminal blocks

2. Fiber Termination Assemblies, including:
a. Fiber connectors
b. Fiber Consolidation Panels
c. Rack and cabinet mounted fiber patch panels
d. Backboard mounted fiber terminal boxes

3. Hybrid Copper/Fiber Termination Assemblies

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Per Division 1.

B. Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

1. EIA-310-D (1992) Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (ANSI/EIA/310-D)
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS SECTION 27 1119-2

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 10 00 - Structured Cabling, Basic Materials and Methods.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Not Used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the manufacturers specified in this section establish the minimum functional, aesthetic and quality standards required for work of this section.

2.2 COPPER CABLE TERMINATION DEVICES AND RELATED
A. Category 5e Terminal Block.

1. Drawing reference(s):
a. 110TB6 6 pair
b. 110TB25 25 pair
c. 110TB50 50 pair
d. 110TB100 100 pair
e. 110TB300 300 pair
f. 110TB600 600 pair

2. General: Insulation displacements connector blocks consisting of oxygen free mechanical fastening system arranged in a flame-retardant molded plastic fastened to a mounting bracket.

3. Features/Functions
a. “110 type” punch down type.

4. Conforms with REA PE-87.

5. Performance:
a. Complies with Commscope/Systimax 110 Premises Distribution System Specifications
b. Electrical (measured at 50 MHz).
c. Resistance: Not more than .4 ohms/termination
d. Inductance: Not more than 13 nH/termination
e. Capacitance:
1) Not more than .9 pF/termination, same pair.
2) Not more than .7 pF/termination, next pair.

6. Construction/Implementation
a. Provide complete with standoff mounting brackets
b. Provide trough at the bottom of each column of blocks. c. Unless otherwise noted, provide WMP between each column of blocks, and at the outside edges of each group of block columns.

7. Manufacturer:
a. Siemon S110 or S110M Modular Tower System
1) S110M42-300FT300 Pair
2) S110M42-400FT400 Pair
3) S110M42-500FT500 Pair
4) S188WDTrough
b. Ortronics.
1) 110-PB2-300FT300 Pair
2) 110-PB2-900FT900 Pair
c. Hubbell Wall Mount Kits, 110
d. AMP CrossConnect Distribution Frame Kit 56985* Series e. Leviton
f. Commscope/Systimax
g. Commscope/Uniprise
h. Wiremold.
i. Panduit.
j. or equal.

B. Rack Mount Category 6 Terminal Block

1. Drawing reference
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS SECTION 27 1119-4 a. 110TB050RM 50 pair
b. 110TB100RM 100 pair
c. 110TB200RM 200 pair
d. 110TB300RM 300 pair

2. Construction
a. Category 6 110 Block mounted on a 19" rack panel.
b. Otherwise as for 110TB

3. Manufacturer
a. Panduit P110B100R2Y
b. Siemon
c. Ortronics
d. Hubbell
e. Leviton
f. or equal
C. Data Patch Panels, Keystone, Rack Mounted

1. Drawing Reference:***CXPPK, or CXPP, where *** refers to port count and X to Category rating of ports.

2. Functions/Features:
a. 19" EIA rack mountable.
b. At least 24 ports per EIA rack unit (1.75").Industry standard keystone openings in steel plate arranged in rows on steel panel, jacks on front, terminations on rear.
c. Port identifier label space on front.
d. Fill each opening with Category 6 keystone jacks as specified herein above. Coordinate jack selection with patch panel construction to ensure that jack width behind the panel does not prevent fully loading panel. e. Integral cable management bar at rear.

3. Manufacturer
a. Leviton QuickPort High Density Multimedia Patch Panels with Management Bar
a. Belden KeyConnect
b. Panduit Netkey
c. Hubbell Xcelerator Series Panels
d. Ortronics
e. or equal.

D. Category 3 Rack Mount Patch Panels with Pre-Wired RJ-21C (50 Pin) connector, 8P4C Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS SECTION 27 1119-5

1. Drawing reference:
a. **PWC3PP, where ** designates port count.

2. Features/Functions/Construction:
a. 19" EIA rack mount panel.
b. Front face - RJ45

3. Rear Face – Two pre-wired RJ21C connector (50 Pin).

4. Printed Circuit board linking RJ45's to two RJ21C (Amphenol Connectors) to center 2 pairs (pins 3-6) on RJ45’s.

5. Approvals
a. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 for Category 3 performance
b. ANSI/TIA-1096A (formerly FCC Part 68)
c. Nationally recognized test laboratory (NRTL) listed

6. At least 24 Jacks per rack unit (RU).

7. Manufacturers:
a. Leviton 49014-J24
b. Hubbell
c. Amp
d. Panduit
e. or equal

2.3 FIBER CABLE TERMINATION DEVICES AND RELATED
A. Fiber Optic Connectors and Related:

1. General
a. Connectors to comply with:
1) EIA/TIA-4750000-C
2) EIA/TIA-604-3A

2. Fusion Splice System
a. Insertion Loss:
1) ≤0.03 dB - manufacturer’s rating for typical splice– multimode 2) ≤0.06 dB - manufacturer’s rating for typical splice– singlemode. b. Manufacturer
1) Corning Cable Systems Model X77 Micro Fusion Splicer 2) AFL Telecommunications.
3) or equal.

3. Connectors:
a. LC with manufacturer installed fiber pigtails unless otherwise noted or scheduled. Contractor to fusion splice the supplied pigtail to the fiber backbone cabling installed under the work of this Project. b. Connector performance per TIA- 568.C.3 and the following. 1) Insertion Loss:
a) Multimode:
(1) Less than or equal to 0.75 dB per mated pair
b) Singlemode, Ultra Polish
(1) Less than or equal to 0.75 dB per mated pair
c) Singlemode, Angle Polish
(1) Less than or equal to 0.30 dB per mated pair
2) Return Loss
a) Singlemode, Ultra Polish, greater than or equal to 55 dB b) Singlemode, Angle Polish, greater than or equal to 65 dB
3) Manufacturer, Connector
a) Corning Cable Systems
b) AMP
c) Commscope/Systimax
d) Hubbell
e) Leviton
f) Ortronics
g) or equal.

B. Fiber Distribution Panels, Splice and Patch.

1. Drawing References:
a. *** FPP, Fiber Patch Panel where *** refers to the fiber port count.

2. Features/Functions/Performance:
a. 19" EIA rack mount.
b. Suitable for housing fiber optic mechanical splices in a neat and orderly fashion.
c. Stores a minimum of one meter of cable without kinks or twists. d. Suitable for use with connectors with manufacturer supplied fiber pigtails as required herein above, fusion spliced to building and outside plant backbone cabling.
e. Provides individual strain relief for each splice.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS SECTION 27 1119-7 f. Suitable for reentry, if required for future maintenance or modification, without damage to the cable or splices
g. All required splice organizer hardware, such as splice trays, protective glass shelves, and shield bond connectors shall be provided. h. Incorporates cable tie downs and routing rings.
i. Quick-Release Hinges — Spring loaded quick release hinges enable easy removal of front and rear doors for complete access to fiber connections j. Enhanced Labeling — Label virtually any port configuration hinged labels. The labels hang on the front door for improved visibility. When the door is opened, labels flip down allowing ready viewing of the label and corresponding ports.
k. Rotating Grommets — Rotating grommets facilitate loading and retention of jumpers and fiber while minimizing microbending stress when using the sliding tray.
l. Complete Access — Management tray has a positive stop in both front and rear working positions providing complete access for moving, adding, changing, or cleaning of fiber connections
m. Maximum Capacity — Enables a maximum amount of fibers to be patched or patched and spliced in a 2, 3, and 4 RMS enclosure without compromising the accessibility. This allows more efficient utilization of rack space.
n. Top and bottom access holes located at the rear of the enclosure allow fibers to be routed between tandem enclosures without having to run fibers outside of the enclosure.
o. Color coded front panel patch connector - color yellow at singlemode strands and color blue at multimode strands. Provide manufacturer’s blank cover inserts at unused openings.
p. High Density - FPP can terminate between 18 to 36 strands per rack unit.

Higher density assemblies not acceptable unless otherwise indicated on the plans.

3. Manufacturer:
a. Corning Cable Systems Pretium Connector Housing (PCH) with splice trays, strain relief and Closet Connector Housing (CCH) inserts as required.
b. Leviton
c. Realm Communications Group Inc. Rack Mount Patch and Splice Panels d. Hubbell OptiChannel FCR Rack Mount Enclosures with FSP Adapter Panels as required.
e. Panduit
f. Ortronics
g. Commscope/Systimax
h. or equal.

3.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to Section 27 13 00 - Communications Indoor Backbone Cabling for requirements for termination of Riser and Outside Plant Cabling within Communications Rooms B. Refer to Section 27 10 00 – Structured Cabling, Basic Materials and Methods and Section 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling.

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Related Work In Other Sections:

1. Section 27 05 33 – Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems

2. Section 27 05 36 – Cable Trays for Communications Systems

3. Section 27 05 39 – Surface Raceways for Communications Systems

4. Section 27 05 43 – Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems

5. Section 27 05 53 – Identification for Communications Systems

6. Section 27 10 00 – Structured Cabling, Basic Materials and Methods

7. Section 27 11 16 – Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures

8. Section 27 11 19 – Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels

9. Section 27 13 00 – Communications Interior Backbone Cabling

10. Section 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes

1. Innerduct Inside buildings and at outside plant

2. Cable Management at Communication Room Backboards

3. Cable Management at rack mounted Patch Panels, including provision of cable management for cabling installed under the work of this Project as well as for Sacramento Public Library furnished patch cords at equipment racks

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM D2239-03 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter
B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1. UL 910 Test for Flame-Propagation and Smoke-Density Values for Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables used in Spaces Transporting Environmental Air (Nov. 1998)
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE MANAGEMENT SECTION 27 1123-2

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 10 00 - Structured Cabling, Basic Materials and Methods.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Conform with the requirements of Conditions of Construction Contract, Division 1 Specification and Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications.

1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Not Used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INNERDUCT
A. Innerduct, Single Chamber

1. Drawing and spec reference(s):
a. ID*, Innerduct ("*" denotes cross sectional area of innerduct referenced to standard conduit trade size).
b. IDP*, Innerduct, Plenum ("*" denotes cross sectional area of innerduct referenced to standard conduit trade size).

2. Construction:
a. Selected product suitable for:
1) underground installation in ductbank,
2) plenum (IDP)
3) exposed, in interior utility rooms where indicated.
b. High density polyethylene.
c. Ribbed or similar exterior construction to resist crushing surface to promote fiber cable installation.
d. Provides an interior chamber with a capacity equal to a trade size conduit referenced above.

3. Approvals:

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE MANAGEMENT SECTION 27 1123-3
a. ASTM D2239(1985) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.
b. IDP - UL Standard Test Method 2024 of UL 910.

4. Manufacturers, ID in underground ductbanks:
a. Carlon Optic-Gard/PE.
b. Arnco.
c. Vikimatic.
d. or equal.

5. Manufacturers, ID in interior, non-plenum applications:
a. Carlon Optic-Gard/PVC.
b. Arnco.
c. Vikimatic.
d. or equal.

6. Manufacturers, IDP:
a. Carlon Plenum-Gard.
b. Arnco.
c. Vikimatic.
d. or equal.

B. Innerduct, UV Rated

1. Drawing Reference: ID, UV Rated*, where"*" denotes cross sectional area of each chamber referenced to standard conduit trade size).

2. Approvals:
a. ASTM D2239(1985) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter.

3. Construction.
a. Listed for UV exposure.

4. Manufacturers:
a. Tamaqua Plus II Series Telecom Duct.
b. Allwire Black AllDuct.
c. or equal.

C. Woven Mesh Innerduct

1. Drawing Reference: MID, WMID

2. Features/Functions
a. Three inch wide woven mesh assembly contains at least three continuous pullable sleeves, each can accommodate a cable of at least 1” diameter.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE MANAGEMENT SECTION 27 1123-4
b. Systems providing fewer than 3 integrally woven sleeves per WMID assembly not acceptable.
c. Includes color coded pull tape in each sleeve.
d. Pre-Lubricated for cable pulling
e. Non-Hydroscopic
f. 2500 Pound Tensile Strength
g. 480 degree melting point.
h. At least 5 years prior field use including at least 25 million feet of product in use.
i. Provide plenum rated assembly at plenum locations as defined by the National Electric Code.

3. Manufacturers:
a. Maxcell/TVC 3” 3-cell in three unique colors per duct. b. or equal (No known equal with identical 3 sleeves woven into a single assembly nor equal industry usage).

2.2 PATCH PANEL CABLE MANAGEMENT
A. Patch Panel Wire Management, Rack Mounted, Snap Cover.

1. Drawing References:
a. 1 RU Version: RMWM1C
b. 2 RU Version: RMWM2C

2. Construction
a. EIA 19 " Rack Mount, as required
b. Continuous flexible system of T shaped fingers and slots along top and panel, deburred to avoid snagging patch cord jacket.
c. Contoured front door with snap-hinges swings up or down and stays in the open position while cabling.
d. Three edge-protected, oval-shaped pass-through ports allow patch cords to pass front-to-rear.
e. Select depth to match installed depth of vertical wire managers

3. Capacity
a. 1 RU - accommodates at least 35 patch cords.
b. 2 RU - accommodates at least 70 patch cords.

4. Manufacturers – 2 RU, including for use with R15 rack:
a. B-line SB87019S2FB (Design Basis)
b. Chatsworth 35441-702.
c. Panduit
d. Siemon
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE MANAGEMENT SECTION 27 1123-5
e. Ortronics
f. or equal.

5. Manufacturers – 2 RU, for use with R15N rack
a. Panduit NMF2 (Design Basis)
b. B-line
c. Chatsworth.
d. Siemon
e. Ortronics
f. or equal.

6. Manufacturers – 1 RU
a. As for 2 RU, in one RU height.

2.3 BACKBOARD CABLE MANAGEMENT
A. Fiber Management Ring, Preformed Loop

1. Drawing Reference: FMR

2. Construction:
a. 24 inch diameter steel ring stores fiber slack using Velco fasteners at regular intervals around ring.
b. Screw fastens to backboard at BDF or IDF.

3. Manufacturer
a. Leviton 48900-OFR
b. Panduit
c. or equal.

B. Wire Management Rings, Wall/Ceiling Mounted:

1. Drawing References/Functions Features:
a. WMRB - Bridle Ring Type, Threaded Lag Screw
b. WMRC - Closed Ring, U shaped assembly with two screw holes at ends, c. WMRO - Open, Re-enterable Split Ring permitting cables to be inserted midspan, two screw holes at ends
d. WMP** - Steel back board with 4 inch deep min, 8 inch wide vertical wire management rings, front enterable. Provide trough at bottom of each column of WMP.
e. WMP**T - Narrow, steel back board with 4 inch deep min, 3 inch wide vertical wire management rings, front enterable.

2. Provide as required to support indicated cable bundle and location.

3. Provide type WMRB at wood frame construction for cable hung from underside of ceiling, unless otherwise noted.

4. Manufacturers:
a. WMRB:
1) B-Line Fasteners, BR Series
2) Senior Industries
3) T&B
4) or equal.
b. WMRC
5) Chatworth Products 12127 and 10812 2” and 3” Wall Mount Closed D Ring. 6) Senior Industries
7) or equal.
c. WMRO
8) Chatworth Products Wall Mount 12035 Open Ring.
9) AllenTel
10) Commscope/Systimax, Inc.
11) Siemon
12) or equal.
d. WMP
13) Siemon S188-*** to match adjacent terminal blocks with S188-WD 14) Ortronics OR-806003194 or OR-806003196 to match terminal blocks. 15) By any manufacturer listed for 110TB under Section 27 11 19 – Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels
16) or equal.
e. WMP**T
17) Siemon S110M-WM-*** to match adjacent terminal blocks 18) By any manufacturer of listed for 110TB under Section 27 11 19 – Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels
19) or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INNERDUCT INSTALLATION
A. Schedule of Application

1. Underground
a. Provide WMID at new and existing ducts used by the work of this project. Provide the WMID in sufficient quantity at each segment to place the indicated fiber cabling plus 3 spare cells. Example: Where the plans indicate provision of 3 OSP fiber cables in a ductbank segment, provide at least two 3-cell WMID.

Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE MANAGEMENT SECTION 27 1123-7
b. Place fiber cabling meeting the maximum diameter requirements of the WMID manufacturer inside WMID.
c. Omit WMID at conduits smaller than 2”

2. At tray conditions in utility tunnel and at backboard, cable runway and tray conditions at communications closets, protect fiber cabling with ID Innerduct.

3. At plenum tray conditions, provide IDP.

4. At 4” and larger interior conduits, provide riser or plenum rated WMID as applies. Provide the WMID in sufficient quantity at each segment to place the indicated cabling plus 3 spare cells. Example: Where the plans indicate provision of 3 OSP fiber cables in a conduit, provide at least two 3-cell WMID.

Provide plenum rated WMID at plenum conditions.

3.2 GENERAL
A. Refer to Section 27 13 00 Communications Indoor Backbone Cabling for requirements for cable routing within Communications Rooms.

END OF SECTION
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE MANAGEMENT SECTION 27 1123-8
Smith, Fause & McDonald, Inc. CITY OF SACRAMENTO – Martin Luther King, Jr. Library Remodel Group 4 Project No. 23604-01 Back Check Submission – November 01, 2024 COMMUNICATIONS INDOOR BACKBONE CABLING SECTION 27 1300-1 SECTION 27 1300 - COMMUNICATIONS INDOOR BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related work in other Sections